Mini Operator Interface Terminal User`s Manual, GFK

Mini Operator Interface Terminal User`s Manual, GFK
ÎÎ
GE Fanuc Automation
Programmable Control Products
Mini Operator Interface
Terminal
User’s Manual
GFK-0361B
November 1993
GFL–002
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages,
currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this
equipment or may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to
equipment, a Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding
and operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While
efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not
purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for
every possible contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance.
Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software
systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this
document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or
statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness,
sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of
merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply.
The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
Alarm Master
CIMPLICITY
CIMPLICITY 90–ADS
CIMPLICITY PowerTRAC
CIMSTAR
GEnet
Genius
Genius PowerTRAC
Helpmate
Logicmaster
Modelmaster
ProLoop
PROMACRO
Series One
Series Three
Series Five
Copyright 1993 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
Series Six
Series 90
VuMaster
Workmaster
Preface
Content of this Manual
This manual consists of 6 chapters each of which is summarized below.
Chapter 1. Introduction: This chapter provides a general overview of the features and
operation of the Mini OIT. Specifications of the Mini OIT are included.
Chapter 2. Getting Started: This chapter is a step–by–step tutorial on how to start
up the Mini OIT and perform basic operations. The chapter describes basic OptiSCREEN file editing using numerous examples.
Chapter 3. Installation: This chapter describes in detail how to connect AC power,
connect the battery, make communication cables, and install memory.
Chapter 4. Operation: This chapter explains in detail how to operate the Mini OIT. It
includes sections on Mini OIT configuration, keyboard operation, and OptiSCREEN Editor operations.
Chapter 5. OptiSCREEN Command Reference: This chapter describes each OptiSCREEN command in detail.
Chapter 6. Utility Programs for the IBM PC: This chapter describes how to use the
utility programs, provided on diskette, which aid in the development of application programs and screens.
Appendix A. Outline and Mounting Drawings
Appendix B. ASCII Codes and Special Character Sets
Appendix C. Screen Programming Template
Appendix D. ANSI Escape Sequences for PLCs
Appendix E. VT52 Escape Sequences
Appendix F. Function Key Operations
Appendix G. STR–LINK III Communications Protocol
GFK-0361
iii
Preface
Related Publications
D GEK–25398 Series Sixt Programmable Controller ASCII/BASIC Module User’s Manual
D GEK–0269 Series Fivet Programmable Controller ASCII/BASIC Module User’s Manual
D GFK–0249 Series Onet Programmable Controller ASCII/BASIC Module User’s Manual
D GFK–0255 Series 90t Programmable Controller PCM User’s Manual
We Welcome Your Comments and Suggestions
At GE Fanuc Automation, we strive to produce quality technical documentation. After
you have used this manual, please take a few moments to complete and return the
Reader ’s Comment Card located on the next page.
iv
Mini Operator Interface Terminal - September 1993
GFK-0361
Contents
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Features of the Mini OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
General Operation of the Mini OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Creating the Screen Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
Transferring Data Between the Host (PLC) and the Mini OIT . . . . . . . .
1-3
Feature Comparison with Other GE Fanuc OIT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
Keyboards Used With the Mini OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
External Keyboards Used with the Mini OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-7
The Mini OIT Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-9
Specifications of the Mini OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-10
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Installing the AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
Installing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Attaching the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Powering-Up the Mini OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
Battery Voltage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3
Memory Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4
Using the Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Using the OptiSCREEN Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-6
Creating a Text Screen File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
Creating a Graphic Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-10
Changing a Screen File from Absolute to Relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-11
Calling a Screen File from Another Screen File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
Programming the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
Creating a Sample Screen Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
Now That You’ve Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-16
GFK–0361B
Mini Operator Interface Terminal - September 1993
v
Contents
Chapter 3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Mounting the Mini OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
Rear Panel Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
DIP SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Serial and Parallel Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Port Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Serial Port Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
Serial Port Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
Handshaking with RS-232C Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7
Handshaking with RS-422 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
Serial Cable and Connector Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
Typical Serial Cable Wiring Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
Multidrop Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
Parallel Port Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19
Parallel Port Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19
Handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20
Using the Screen Display and Data Fill Command with the Parallel Port
3-20
Easy Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
Parallel Port in User Programmable I/O Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24
Connecting the Parallel Port to PLC Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25
Installing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
CRT Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-29
GFK–0361B
Mini Operator Interface Terminal - September 1993
vi
Contents
Chapter 4
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
On-Line Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Local Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
The Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2
Accessing the Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
Touch Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3
Sample Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
Modifying the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
Saving and Recalling the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
Exiting the Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
Valid Screen Files Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-13
The OptiSCREEN Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14
OptiSCREEN Editor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14
OptiSCREEN Editor Menu Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
OptiSCREEN Editor Special Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
Entering the File Edit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-17
File Editing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-17
Saving, Renumbering, and Renaming a Screen File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-18
Keyboard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-19
Alphabetic Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-19
Non-Alphabetic Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-19
Cursor Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-19
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20
Miscellaneous Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20
Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21
Private Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-21
GFK–0361B
Mini Operator Interface Terminal - September 1993
vii
Contents
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
OptiSCREEN Command Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
OptiSCREEN Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comment and End of File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erasing and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable Keyboard, Touch Screen, and Function Key . . . . . . . . . . .
User Programmable I/O Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Fill Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-2
Conventions for the OptiSCREEN Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Comment Command and the End of File Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2
5-3
Cursor Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling the Appearance of the Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling the Location of the Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Attribute Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparison of Various Character Attribute Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Attribute Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-6
5-9
5-12
Display and File Display Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Erasing and Editing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inserting Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-16
Graphics Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generating Boxes and Boxed Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drawing Bar Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18
5-18
5-21
Programmable Keyboard, Touch Screen, and Function Key Commands . . .
Programmable Keyboard Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch Screen Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Current Key Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24
5-24
5-24
5-24
User Programmable I/O Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example Data Fill Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-28
5-30
5-31
Utility Programs for the IBM PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Starting-Up the Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
IWSLINK - User Memory Backup/Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
IWSFILE - Upload/Download OptiSCREEN files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
IWSEDIT - Screen Development, Editing, Up/Downloading for OITs without
OptiSCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
GFK–0361B
Mini Operator Interface Terminal - September 1993
viii
Contents
Appendix A
Mounting Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Appendix B
ASCII Codes and Special Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
ASCII Codes and Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1
Supplemental Standard Graphics Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-5
Quad Size Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-6
Alternate Graphics Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-7
Supplemental Alternate Graphics Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-10
Appendix C
Screen Programming Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
Appendix D
ANSI Escape Sequences for PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1
Appendix E
VT52 Escape Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
Appendix F
Function Key Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F-1
Appendix G
STR-LINK III Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G-1
GFK–0361B
Mini Operator Interface Terminal - September 1993
ix
Contents
Figure 1-1. The Mini OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
Figure 1-2. Typical Screen Format Created Using the OptiSCREEN Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
Figure 1-3. Connecting the Mini OIT to a PLC through the Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Figure 1-4. Connecting the Mini OIT-Touch to a PLC through the Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
Figure 1-5. Connecting the Mini OIT to a PLC through the Parallel Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5
Figure 1-6. Keyboard Layout for the “Terminal” Version of the 65-Key Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8
Figure 1-7. Keyboard Layout for the “BASIC” Version of the 65-Key Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-8
Figure 1-8. Keyboard Layout for the “Qwerty ” Version of the 65-Key Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-9
Figure 2-1. Installing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
Figure 2-2. The Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-5
Figure 2-3. The OptiSCREEN Editor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-7
Figure 2-4. Sample Screen Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
Figure 3-1. Rear View of the Mini OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Figure 3-2. Battery Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
Figure 3-3. Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4
Figure 3-4. Serial Port Using DB-25P Male Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6
Figure 3-5. RS-232C Point-to-Point Communication with Handshaking
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series Six ASCII/BASIC Module Port 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
Figure 3-6. RS-232C Point-to-Point Communication, No Handshaking
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series Six ASCII/BASIC Module Port 1 or Port 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
Figure 3-7. RS-422 Point-to-Point Communication
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Port to Series Five ASCII/BASIC Module Port 1 or Port 2) . . . . . .
3-10
Figure 3-8. RS-232C Point-to-Point Communication, No Handshaking
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series Five ASCII/BASIC Module Port 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10
Figure 3-9. RS-422 Point-to-Point Communication, No Handshaking
(Mini OIT Serial to Series 90-70 PCM Module Port 1 or Port 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11
Figure 3-10. RS-232 Point-to-Point Communication with Handshaking
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series 90-70 PCM Module Port 1 or Port 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11
Figure 3-11. RS-422 Point-to-Point Communication with Handshaking
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series 90-30 PCM Module Port 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11
Figure 3-12. RS-232 Point-to-Point Communication with Handshaking
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series 90-30 PCM Module Port 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11
Figure 3-13. RS-422 Point-to-Point Communication
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series 90-30 PCM Module Port 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12
Figure 3-14. RS-422 Multidrop 2-Wire
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series Six ASCII/BASIC Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14
Figure 3-15. RS-422 Multidrop 4-Wire
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series FiveASCII/BASICPort 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15
Figure 3-16. RS-422 Multidrop 4-Wire
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series 90-70 PCM Module 90-70 PCM Module Port 1 or Port 2) .
3-16
Figure 3-17. RS-422 Multidrop 4-Wire
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series 90-30 PCM Module Port 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17
GFK–0361B
Mini Operator Interface Terminal - September 1993
x
Contents
Figure 3-18. The Parallel Port Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19
Figure 3-19. Parallel Port Wiring to a Series One PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
Figure 3-20. Memory Socket and Jumper Locations for the Mini OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-27
Figure 3-21. CRT Controls for the Mini OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-29
Figure 4-1. The Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4
Figure 4-2. Serial Port Loop-Back Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
Figure 4-3. Parallel Port Loop-Back Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11
Figure 4-4. The OptiSCREEN Editor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15
Figure 5-1. Key Location Numbers for the 65-Position Sealed Membrane Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25
Figure 5-2. Key Location Numbers for the 40-Position MiniOIT Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26
Figure A-1. Dimensions of the Mini OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
Figure A-2. Mounting Diagram for the Mini OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
GFK–0361B
Mini Operator Interface Terminal - September 1993
xi
Contents
Table 1-1. Feature Comparison Between OIT Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-6
Table 3-1. Parallel Port Connections for Easy Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
Table 3-2. Data Kind Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21
Table 3-3. Numeric Data Length Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22
Table 3-4. Length of ASCII Encoded Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23
Table 3-5. Calling Up Messages Using BCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23
Table 3-6. Parallel Port Bit Values for User Programmable I/O Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24
Table 3-7. Mini OIT Memory Bank Socket and Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26
Table 4-1. Summary of Configuration Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6
Table 4-2. Default Configuration for the Mini OIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7
Table 4-3. Communication Test Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12
Table 5-1. Character/Graphics Modes and ASCII Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10
Table 5-2. Parallel Port Bit Values for User Programmable I/O Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-28
Table D-1. Escape Sequence OptiSCREEN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-2
Table D-1. Escape Sequence OptiSCREEN Command - continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-3
Table D-1. Escape Sequence OptiSCREEN Command - continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-4
GFK–0361B
Mini Operator Interface Terminal - September 1993
xii
restart lowapp ARestart oddapp: ARestarts for autonumbers that do not restart in
each chapter. figure bi level 1, reset table_big level 1, reset chap_big level 1, reset1
Lowapp Alwbox restart evenap:A1app_big level 1, resetA figure_ap level 1, reset
table_ap level 1, reset figure level 1, reset table level 1, reset these restarts
oddbox reset: 1evenbox reset: 1must be in the header frame of chapter 1. a:ebx, l 1
resetA a:obx:l 1, resetA a:bigbx level 1 resetA a:ftr level 1 resetA c:ebx, l 1 reset1
c:obx:l 1, reset1 c:bigbx level 1 reset1 c:ftr level 1 reset1 Reminders for
autonumbers that need to be restarted manually (first instance will always be 4)
let_in level 1: A. B. C. letter level 1:A.B.C. num level 1: 1. 2. 3. num_in level 1: 1. 2.
3. rom_in level 1: I. II. III. roman level 1: I. II. III. steps level 1: 1. 2. 3.
Chapter
1 Introduction
1
The Mini Operator Interface Terminal (Mini OIT) is a rugged, compact, conversational
terminal specifically built for use as an operator’s console. It is intended for use with a
wide variety of intelligent, industrial machines that are capable of communication over a
serial or parallel interface. These industrial machines may be host computers, CNC
systems, programmable controllers, robots, and other computer-based data acquisition,
monitoring, and control systems. In this publication, however, the intelligent machine
described will be a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) such as the Series Onet,
Series Fivet, Series Sixt, Series 90t-70, or Series 90-30 PLC from GE Fanuc Automation.
This chapter provides an overview of the Mini OIT. The topics covered are:
D
D
D
D
D
Features of the Mini OIT
General System Operation
Feature Comparison with Other GE Fanuc OIT Models
Keyboards for the Mini OIT
Specifications
Features of the Mini OIT
The compact size and rugged nature of the Mini OIT makes it ideal for factory floor
applications. The Mini OIT comes in two models, the standard Mini OIT (IC600KD515)
and the Mini OIT-Touch (IC600KD516) which includes touch screen capability. The Mini
OIT operates using either the ANSI X3.64, the VT-100 or the VT-52 escape sequences.
This means the Mini OIT can replace many terminals which also use these escape
sequences such as the DEC VT-100 and VT-220. See the illustration of the Mini OIT
below.
a42837
GE Fanuc
Mini OIT
Figure 1-1. The Mini OIT
GFK-0361
1-1
1
Other important features of the Mini OIT are described below.
D
Size: The Mini OIT is very compact yet capable of displaying up to 16 lines of 80
characters each.
D
OptiSCREEN Editor: The OptiSCREEN Editor allows you to create screens easily using
English language commands.
D
Touch Screen Capability: If the Mini OIT is equipped with the touch screen option (Mini
OIT-Touch), the OptiSCREEN Editor can create touch boxes which are displayed on the
screen to be used for operator inputs.
D
Serial and Parallel Interface: There are two ports on the Mini OIT; 1 serial port and 1
parallel port. The serial port is used to connect to a host such as a Series 90-70 PLC
through the Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM). The parallel port can be
connected directly to the I/O of a PLC for data transfer.
D
Configuration Screen: All communications parameters and terminal set up is done
through an easy-to-use menu on the Configuration Screen
D
Keyboards: GE Fanuc offers a NEMA 4, full ASCII sealed keyboard for use with the
Mini OIT. There is a DIN connector on the back of the unit for the standard IBM PC-XT
keyboard which can also be used.
General Operation of the Mini OIT
The Mini OIT is designed to receive dynamic (changing) information from the host
computer (PLC) and display it on the screen in a user-programmed screen format. This
format is created using the OptiSCREEN Editor and typically does not change as often
as the dynamic information from the PLC. The operator can enter data and initiate
action to be taken by the PLC by pressing programmed touch keys on the screen or by
pressing keys on an attached keyboard.
The information displayed on the Mini OIT is of two types.
D
D
Dynamic information such as counter or timer values from the PLC.
Screen format programmed using the OptiSCREEN Editor which makes the
dynamic information easy to read.
Creating the Screen Format
The OptiSCREEN Editor allows you to create screen formats easily, using
English-language commands instead of the cumbersome escape sequences required on
some terminals. The screen format usually consists of the screen title, explanations of
the dynamic data, and any graphics such as lines and boxes used to clearly present the
data.
1-2
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
1
The figure below illustrates a typical screen format.
a42838
AUTO-PLATER
SELECT FUNCTION
F1
F1 Hoist Control
RUN TIME
FAULTS
F2 Rectifier Control
F2
Today
Week
Today
Week
Figure 1-2. Typical Screen Format Created Using the OptiSCREEN Editor
Transferring Data Between the Host (PLC) and the Mini OIT
The Mini OIT features two separate ways in which to connect the Mini OIT to the PLC:
D
Through the Serial Port to a BASIC language processing module (such as the PCM or
ASCII/BASIC module) in the PLC.
D
Through the Parallel Port directly to 5 V TTL I/O modules of the PLC.
These methods for transferring data are described very briefly below. Refer to later
chapters for more details.
Transferring Data Through the Serial Port
The serial port includes an RS-232 or an RS-422 interface which can be connected to an
intelligent module such as the ASCII/BASIC module. This module runs the BASIC
programming language which can acquire data from the PLC, manipulate it if necessary,
and transfer it to the Mini OIT so it can be displayed in the applicable screen format.
The ASCII/BASIC module also retrieves operator-entered data and key presses to be
acted upon by the PLC.
GFK-0361
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-3
1
The figures below show the connections for a serial configuration using the Mini OIT
and for the Mini OIT-Touch.
a44762
MINI OIT
SERIAL
CABLE
KEYBOARD
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
*GE FANUC AUTOMATION
PLC WITH BASIC
LANGUAGE PROCESSOR
(SERIES 90-70 PLC WITH PCM SHOWN)
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
*P
C
M
Figure 1-3. Connecting the Mini OIT to a PLC through the Serial Port
THE MINI OIT-TOUCH HAS
TOUCH SCREEN CAPABILITY
AND DOES NOT REQUIRE AN
EXTERNAL KEYBOARD EXCEPT
FOR INITIAL CONFIGURATION
MINI OIT-TOUCH
a44763
*GE FANUC AUTOMATION
PLC WITH BASIC
LANGUAGE PROCESSOR
(SERIES 90-70 PLC WITH PCM SHOWN)
Î
Î
*
P
C
M
Î
Î
SERIAL
CABLE
Figure 1-4. Connecting the Mini OIT-Touch to a PLC through the Serial Port
1-4
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
1
Transferring data through the Parallel Port.
Some operations require only the display of data by the PLC, and do not require
operator input. For this type of application, the parallel port can be configured in ”Easy
Display Mode” which makes this easy to do.
In Easy Display Mode the parallel port is connected directly to 5 V TTL output modules
of the PLC. The ladder program in the PLC performs any necessary manipulations or
calculations with the data (instead of an ASCII/BASIC module) and then sends the data
directly through the output modules to the Mini OIT. The figure below shows how this
system would be connected together.
a42841
IN EASY DISPLAY MODE, THE
MINI OIT IS USED FOR DISPLAY
ONLY AND REQUIRES
NO EXTERNAL KEYBOARD
*GE FANUC AUTOMATION
PLC OUTPUT MODULE
(SERIES FIVE SHOWN)
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
* *
MINI OIT
PARALLEL
CABLE
Figure 1-5. Connecting the Mini OIT to a PLC through the Parallel Port
GFK-0361
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-5
1
Feature Comparison with Other GE Fanuc OIT Models
The table below explains the differences in features between the full-sized monochrome
OIT, the full-sized color OIT, and the Mini OIT.
Table 1-1. Feature Comparison Between OIT Models
Full Size Monochrome
IC600KD530,533
Feature
1-6
Full Size Color
IC600KD532,534
Mini OIT
IC600KD515,516
OptiSCREEN Editing
Yes
Yes
Yes
Touch Screen CRT
No
No
Yes - IC600KD516 only
Keyboards Available
(Sealed Membrane type)
34-pos. built in
65-position full ASCII
34-pos. built in
65-position full ASCII
OptiBASICAvailable
Yes - IC600KD533 only
Yes - IC600KD534 only
No
Ports
3 serial
3 serial
1 serial - 1 parallel
User Memory
IC600KD530 60 Kbytes shipped
156 Kbytes total
IC600KD533 156 Kbytes shipped and total
IC600KD532 60 Kbytes shipped
156 Kbytes total
IC600KD534 156 Kbytes shipped and total
IC600KD515,
IC600KD516 30 Kbytes shipped
62 Kbytes total
Memory Cartridge Option
Yes IC600KD533 only
Yes IC600KD534 only
No
Character Sets
95 ASCII, 161 Graphic, 80
Quad Size letters, numbers,
symbols
95 ASCII, 161 Graphic, 80
Quad Size letters, numbers,
symbols
95 ASCII, 33 Graphic from Supplemental Stand. char. set. Quad
size letters, but no Alternate character set or Quad size process
symbols
IBM Keyboard Connector
Types
DIN for full-size IBM PCs.
Modular for portable IBM PCs
DIN for full-size IBM PCs.
Modular for portable IBM PCs
DIN type only for full size IBM
PCs
Color CRT
No
Yes
No
Screen Size
12’’ diag.
25 lines,
80 char. per line
12’’ diag.
25 lines,
80 char. per line
5’’ x 9’’,
16 lines,
80 char. per line
Status Lines
1-4
1-4
None
Battery Backed Clock and
Calendar
Yes
Yes
No
Bell Output
Yes
Yes
No
Reset Input
Yes
Yes
No
65-position full ASCII
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
1
Keyboards Used With the Mini OIT
This section includes information on the keyboards available for use with the Mini OIT
including the touch screen. Topics covered are:
D
D
External Keyboards Used with the Mini OIT
The Mini OIT Touch Screen
External Keyboards Used with the Mini OIT
The Mini OIT supports IBM PC-XT compatible keyboards for screen programming and
for certain permanent applications. Also, a 65-key sealed keyboard is available for the
Mini OIT. The sealed, flush-mounted keyboard has built-in tactile feedback and is
designed for use in the most severe environments.
IBM PC-XT Compatible Keyboards
During screen programming, and for certain permanent applications, a full-travel
Qwerty style keyboard may be desirable. A circular ”DIN” style connector used with full
size IBM PCs is provided on the rear panel of the Mini OIT.
Note
The IBM PC-AT type keyboard is not compatible with the Mini OIT.
An IBM PC-XT compatible keyboard may be connected and used simultaneously with
any of the sealed keyboards.
The 65-Key Sealed Membrane Keyboard
The 65-key keyboard features a 5 x 13 block layout of large rectangular keys. The key
legends are printed on strips of material that slide inside the keyboard matrix. This
allows custom keyboard labeling at nominal cost, while maintaining a proven
environmental seal. There are 3 standard keyboard layouts for this keyboard: Terminal,
BASIC, and Qwerty. The key layouts for these keyboards are shown in the following
figures.
GFK-0361
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-7
1
a42850
:
;
RESET
A
B
C
D
E
F
BREAK
G
H
I
J
K
L
7
CTRL
M
N
O
P
Q
R
4
REPEAT
S
T
U
V
W
X
1
SHIFT
Y
Z
LINE
FEED
BACK
SPACE
SPACE
ENTER
.
&
!
?
”
’
*
8
$
/
5
2
9
%
@
>
6
3
,
0
~
|
{
^
[
‘
F3
F4
F1
F2
#
HOME
<
DEL
ESC
Figure 1-6. Keyboard Layout for the “Terminal” Version of the 65-Key Keyboard
a42851
A
B
C
D
E
F
BREAK
G
H
I
J
K
L
7
CTRL
M
N
O
P
Q
R
4
REPEAT
S
T
U
V
W
X
1
SHIFT
Y
Z
BACK
SPACE
SPACE
ENTER
.
&
8
$
”
’
:
;
RESET
5
!
2
>
0
*
%
@
/
?
F1
F2
9
{
F3
F4
6^
[
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
3
,
#
|
~
<
‘
Figure 1-7. Keyboard Layout for the “BASIC” Version of the 65-Key Keyboard
1-8
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
1
a42852
RESET
ESC
TAB
DEL
HOME
!
4
$
5
%
6
^
CTRL
Q
W
E
R
T
Y
U
REPEAT
A
S
D
F
G
H
Z
X
C
V
B
|
3
#
1
SHIFT
2
@
BREAK
7
&
BACK
SPACE
8
*
F5
F1
F6
F2
9
0
I
O
P
J
K
L
;
N
M
<
,
.
F7
F3
[
:
{
”
’
>
/
F8
F4
]
}
RETURN
?
SPACE
Figure 1-8. Keyboard Layout for the “Qwerty” Version of the 65-Key Keyboard
This keyboard consists of a series of membrane switches that are interpreted by the logic
board of the Mini OIT. When different keyboard inserts are used with the keyboard, a
different keyboard ”Type” is selected from the Configuration screen. The Terminal
layout is Type 1, the BASIC layout is Type 2, and the Qwerty layout is Type 4.
The Mini OIT Touch Screen
The CRT of the Mini OIT is segmented into 4 rows by 10 columns of key pads for a total
of 40 keys. When the touch screen is used, Type 5 keyboard must be selected in the
Configuration screen. The key value for each key can be programmed by the user. The
touch screen keys are defined by using the OptiSCREEN Editor statement:
MAKE TOUCH BOX Pn AT LOCATION Pn WITH VALUE Pn
This command is used when designing a screen format. It allows you to draw a touch
box at a specific location and of a particular size and type with a user defined value. See
Appendix B for a complete list of values. When the touch box is pressed, the value is
sent out the designated port or ports as it would when a key of any other keyboard was
pressed.
Refer to Chapter 5 for details of programming the Touch Box command using the
OptiSCREEN Editor.
GFK-0361
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-9
1
Specifications of the Mini OIT
Listed below are the specifications for the Mini OIT, which include display, keyboard,
physical and electrical, and miscellaneous data.
Display
CRT - monochrome only:
CRT Window:
Display Format:
Display Size:
Character Size:
Character Set:
5I x 9I high contrast amber.
Gasketed .125I smoked LEXAN (TM), UV hardcoated, scratch resistant and non-glare surface.
16 lines of 80 characters,
3.5I high x 7.5I wide.
0.2I high x 0.1I wide (approx.).
95 ASCII and 33 graphic from standard character set only, quad size letters, but no alternate character set or quad size process symbols.
Character Type:
5 x 7 dot matrix, except: 5 x 9 dot matrix for lower-case characters with descenders, 8 x 10 dot matrix for graphics.
Video Attributes:
Dim, normal, and highlight video for foreground and background, plus underline. Blink, and
double wide on a character basis, double high and wide on a line basis.
Cursor:
Cursor Addressing:
Scroll:
Blinking or continuous, underline, block, or none.
Relative and direct.
Full or split screen.
Keyboard
Sealed Keyboard
Keyboard Tactile Feedback:
Keyboard Surface:
Keyboard Inserts:
Sealed Keyboard (65-key)
(IC600KD511,optional)
Built-in snap action.
Matte, UV hardcoated polycarbonate.
One set preprinted standard legends.
65 keys in 5 x 13 rectangular matrix on .95I centers, .6I square viewable window area, fully sealed,
with removable legend inserts (Basic, Terminal, Qwerty).
Full Travel Keyboard:
(IC640PKB201,optional)
IBM PC-XT type compatible with DIN connector. (IBM PC-AT type keyboard is not compatible).
Physical and Electrical
Operating Temperature:
Operating Humidity:
Dimensions:
Cutout Size:
Front Panel Finish:
Power Requirements:
0-50_ Celsius.
0-50_ Celsius.
5-95% RH, non-condensing.
See outline drawings in Chapter 5
See outline drawings in Chapter 5
Black, textured polyurethane paint
Monochrome:105-135/210-270VAC, 45W. 50/60 Hz.
Miscellaneous
1-10
Processor:
User Memory - OIT:
Interface:
Z80
30 Kbytes battery-backed CMOS RAM expandable to 62 Kbytes RAM.
Single non-isolated RS-232/422 serial port (DTE), and parallel TTL port. Parallel interface supports
8-bit input and output with strobe and busy control signals.
Data Rates:
Input Buffers:
Handshaking:
50 to 38,400 baud standard.
256 characters per port.
Communications Mode:
Escape Sequences:
Parity:
Word Size:
Stop Bits:
Editing/EraseFunctions:
No-Echo (full duplex) or Echo (half duplex), asynchronous. Point to point or multidrop operation.
ANSI X3.64, VT100, or VT52 mode.
Even, odd, space, mark, or none.
7 or 8 data bits plus parity bit.
Selectable, 1 or 2.
Through software, insert and delete character or line; erase line; erase from beginning of line;
erase from end of line; erase from beginning of page; erase to end of page.
Serial port - (Bi-directional Control): Software via Control-S (X-ON) and Control-Q (X-OFF), or
Hardware via RTS (pin 4) and CTS (pin 5); software selectable Parallel port - (Bi-direct. Control):
Busy and Strobe signals supported. Directions are reversed (DCE).
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
Chapter
2 Getting Started
2
section level 1 1
figure bi level 1
table_big level 1
This chapter explains how to start up the Mini OIT, perform basic keyboard operations,
and do basic OptiSCREEN editing. To perform the steps in this chapter no external
device need be connected except a keyboard.
Topics covered in this chapter are:
D
D
D
D
D
D
Installing the Battery
Attaching the Keyboard
Powering Up the Mini OIT
Modes of Operation: On Line, Local, Edit
Using the Configuration Menu
Using the OptiSCREEN Editor
When you receive your Mini Operator Interface Terminal (Mini OIT) package, you
should receive the Mini OIT and a user’s manual.
Keep the OIT shipping box and packing materials so that you can safely and efficiently
ship the Mini OIT if you need to.
You must supply several items not provided with the Mini OIT:
D
A medium-sized, flat-headed screwdriver and a Phillips screwdriver. You will use
the screwdrivers for several jobs as you start to use your Mini OIT.
D
An IBM PC-compatible keyboard or IBM PC-XT-compatible keyboard. The Mini OIT
does not support the IBM PC-AT-compatible keyboard.
D
An AC power cord.
Installing the AC Power
1.
Locate the AC power terminal strip on the back of your Mini OIT and remove the
yellow terminal block shield.
2.
Using a screwdriver, attach the three wires from an AC power cord to the terminals:
3.
GFK-0361
Terminal
Wire
L1
L2
L3
Hot
Neutral
Ground
Replace the yellow terminal block shield.
2-1
2
Installing the Battery
1.
Locate the small rectangular battery cover plate on the back of the Mini OIT.
Remove the two Phillips screws from the plate, and separate the plate from the Mini
OIT. Notice how two clips hold the battery on the back of the plate.
2.
Locate two sets of battery connections on the logic board just inside the Mini OIT
chassis. Plug the mating connector from the battery cable onto one of the
connections on the logic board. Make sure that the notched side of the mating
connector faces away from you as you plug it in.
3.
Put the cover plate back on the Mini OIT and replace the two screws.
a42844
Î ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
ACCESS
PANEL
OPENING
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
BATTERY
REAR OF UNIT
BATTERY
ACCESS
PANEL
Figure 2-1. Installing the Battery
Attaching the Keyboard
The OIT requires the use of an IBM PC-compatible or XT-compatible keyboard; the OIT
does not support the IBM AT-compatible keyboard although many AT keyboards can be
used as an XT keyboard by setting a switch on the keyboard.
For proper operation, the power to the Mini OIT must be turned off before plugging the
keyboard into the Mini OIT or unplugging the keyboard.
Make sure that the Mini OIT is turned off, and plug the keyboard into the Mini OIT.
2-2
Mini Operator Interface Termainal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
2
Powering-Up the Mini OIT
Plug in the Mini OIT and turn on the AC power switch on the back of the unit.
Caution
The OIT is designed to operate at 120 Volts AC, 60 Hz. Applying 220
Volts AC damages this unit and voids the user warranty.
Make sure that the voltage corresponds to the voltage requirement
indicated on the identification label located on the rear panel of the
unit.
When you turn the unit on, allow the Mini OIT a few seconds to warm up. During this
time the terminal will perform self-diagnostics which test the following:
D
D
D
Proper battery voltage
Proper operation of all system memory
Proper functioning of peripheral circuits
If all tests pass, the message, ”SELF TEST OK”, will be displayed momentarily before the
Mini OIT continues the power up sequence. This message may not be visible if the Mini
OIT has been powered off for some time and the CRT is not warmed up. If any test fails,
a message indicating the type of failure will be displayed.
Note
If the power-up diagnostics pass and if the terminal configuration
previously saved was for Local mode or Edit mode operation, the
terminal will automatically enter the Configuration screen. If a
power-up test fails, follow the instructions below to get to the
Configuration screen, or to the On-Line mode if it was previously
selected and saved.
Battery Voltage Test
If during the battery voltage test the voltage falls below a certain level, the message,
”BATTERY PROBLEMS”, appears. When this first occurs, a limited amount of battery
life may remain. The message, ”BATTERY PROBLEMS”, will also be displayed if the
battery connectors for user memory are improperly installed.
If the message, ”BATTERY PROBLEMS”, appears, first check to see if the Memory Power
Supply jumper is correctly positioned for the type of memory installed. If a CMOS RAM
memory chip has been installed in socket U25, the jumper should be in position
W18-W19. (See Figure 3-20 for location.) If the jumper location is correct, the battery
needs to be replaced. Do not remove the old battery assembly until the new assembly
has been connected.
Note
If the battery is not connected, the terminal will still pass the battery
test. The configuration screen will always be displayed with default
values selected when the battery is not connected.
GFK-0361
Chapter 2 Getting Started
2-3
2
Memor y Test
In addition to checking the battery voltage, the power-up diagnostics routine performs a
checksum on user file memory. A checksum is a mathematical calculation that is
performed to see whether memory has been corrupted. This checksum is compared
with the last checksum stored previously. If the checksum is incorrect, the message,
”USER MEMORY HAS A CHECKSUM ERROR”, appears, followed by the instructions
shown below:
Press 1 to initialize memory and erase screen files.
Press 2 to initialize checksum only.
Press any other key to continue.
Pressing 1 will cause user memory to be initialized and the new checksum stored.
Pressing 2 will store the new checksum only. This allows you to retain the contents of
memory. It may be corrupted, however, so you must verify the screens you stored in
memory before the checksum error occurred. Pressing any other key causes the
message to be ignored.
The following conditions will cause the message, ”CHECKSUM ERROR”, to be
displayed:
D
Initial power-up after batteryinstallation/replacement.
D
Initial power-up after additional user memory has been installed.
D
D
The terminal is turned off or is reset while a file storage operation is taking place.
D
Hardware failure.
Battery back-up jumper(s) for the user memory are not properly installed.
Modes of Operation
There are three modes of operation in which the Mini OIT can power up.
On-Line mode: Normal operating mode after installation and program development
are complete.
Edit mode: Mode for accessing the OptiSCREEN editor to create screens using English
language statements.
Local mode: Mode for creating screens using escape sequences or for testing operation
of escape sequences.
The power-up mode is selected in the Configuration menu. If the Edit mode or Local
mode has been selected, the Configuration menu will appear after power up and will be
displayed for about 30 seconds before the selected mode is entered. If you change an
option on the Configuration menu or simply move the cursor, the screen will remain
displayed about 4 minutes before entering the selected mode. Any subsequent
operation on the Configuration menu will reset the timer.
If the On-line mode was previously selected, the Mini OIT will enter the On-line mode
directly after power up, and the Configuration menu will not appear.
If the Mini OIT is already powered up and the selected mode of operation has been
entered (On-line, Edit, Local) you can access the Configuration menu by pressing the
Control key and the number 1 [Ctrl]-1 on the keyboard simultaneously.
2-4
Mini Operator Interface Termainal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
2
Using the Configuration Menu
Note
The Configuration menu can be accessed by pressing [Ctrl]-1.
A sample Mini OIT Configuration menu with a representative configuration is displayed
below. At the left side of the screen is a list of the various modes and functions that may
be selected. These correspond to the status messages shown on the same row at the
right side of the screen. The box at the bottom of the menu describes the operations
which can be performed while in the Configuration mode, and the keys that may be
used to perform them.
Ge Fanuc Operator Interface Terminal
Rel 2.5-32
060ct93
________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATION
LOCAL
ANSI NO ECHO SEND ANY CASE
END LINE/COLOR
NO WRAP NO AUTO LF
CURSOR/SCREEN
BLINKING BLOCK
CRT SAVER OFF
KEY CODES
THREE
SERIAL PORT
9600
EVEN 7 BIT 1 STOP HARD PT TO PT
PARALLEL PORT MODE
PARALLEL IS AUXILIARY, SERIAL IS PRIMARY
CONFIGURATION
SAVE
TESTS
DIAGNOSTIC
MEMORY
SAVE
SCREENS 00 TO SCREENS 00
________________________________________________________________________________
-UPF1
-DOWNF2
-LEFTF3
-RIGHTF4
-SELECTF5
-PERFORMF6
-EXITF7
Figure 2-2. The Configuration Menu
Modifying the Configuration Menu
This is done as follows:
1.
Move the cursor to the status message which is to be changed by using appropriate
function keys [F1]-[F4].
2.
When the cursor is at the desired status message for a particular feature or function,
press the Select key [F5] to scroll through the options available.
3.
When the desired option is displayed, set the terminal to the new status by simply
moving the cursor to another status message.
4.
After you have selected the desired option for all the features and functions, you can
temporarily save the configuration by pressing the Exit key [F7] to take the terminal
out of Configuration mode. In this case the configuration will be maintained only as
long as the Mini OIT is powered up.
Saving and Recalling the Configuration
The configuration can be saved for future power-off/power- on cycles. When this is
done, the saved configuration will be entered automatically by the terminal on
power-up, regardless of the configuration it had when power was shut down.
To save a configuration set-up, follow this procedure:
1.
GFK-0361
Move the cursor to the configuration SAVE/RECALL status message.
Chapter 2 Getting Started
2-5
2
2.
Press the Select key [F5] to display the SAVE message.
3.
Press the Perform key [F6] to save the displayed configuration.
Note
Any previously saved configuration will be lost when the Save
command is executed.
If you have made changes to the configuration, but you want to recall the last
configuration that was saved, follow this procedure:
1.
Move the cursor to the configuration SAVE/RECALL status message.
2.
Press the Select key [F5] to display the RECALL message.
3.
When the RECALL message is displayed, press the Perform key [F6] to reset the
terminal to the last configuration that was saved.
Exiting the Configuration Menu
This is done by pressing the Exit key [F7]. The terminal will automatically exit the
Configuration menu if the terminal is allowed to remain idle for a period of about 4
minutes. In either case, the terminal will automatically go into the operating mode
displayed on the screen.
When the terminal exits the Configuration menu, the screen will be cleared and the
cursor (if selected) will be in the upper left corner of the screen (HOME). Any data on
the screen prior to entering the Configuration menu will NOT be restored.
Using the OptiSCREEN Editor
In this section of the ”Getting Started” chapter, you create and display five simple screen
files: a text screen file, a graphics screen file, a relative graphics screen file, a screen file
that calls the relative graphics screen file, and a file with touch boxes. Also included is a
more complete sample screen file.
First select the Edit Function from the Configuration menu and press the Perform key
[F7]. The OptiSCREEN Editor Menu will be displayed as shown below.
2-6
Mini Operator Interface Termainal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
2
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
OptiSCREEN Editor SCREEN BANK 0
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
a42846
UTIL
F1
EXIT
F2
EDIT
F5
SHOW
F6
STEP
F7
VIEW
F10
1 - Select edit file
2 - Print syntax list
3 - Print current edit file
4 - Print file
5 - Print directory
6 - Receive file
7 - Delete file(s)
8 - Select screen bank
9 - Select printer/receive device
Figure 2-3. The OptiSCREEN Editor Screen
From the OptiSCREEN Editor menu you can access a variety of functions including the
editor and directory. You can also view the currently selected screen file by pressing the
[F6] SHOW key.
Note
When you enter an editor function, the function keys are no longer
displayed. You can always return to the the OptiSCREEN Editor menu
by pressing the [F1] UTIL key.
Creating a Text Screen File
1.
First press the number 5, Print Directory, to see if a file number ”100” exists. The Text
Screen File you will be creating will be numbered ”100”.
2.
If it does exist, delete it by doing the following.
A. Exit the file directory by pressing [F1] UTIL.
B. Press the number 7, Delete Files, to enter the Delete File(s) function.
C. Answer N to the prompt ”All Files”.
D. Enter the number 100 for the file to be deleted, and press Return. After deleting
the file, the system returns you to the OptiSCREEN Editor menu so that you can
continue working.
3.
If file number 100 does not exist, press the number 1, Select Edit File, from the
OptiSCREEN Editor menu.
4.
Enter the number 100 at the prompt ”Type file number:” The OptiSCREEN editor
places you in an empty screen.
Enter the following commands to generate the screen file. Feel free to enter the
name of your company between quotes where YOUR COMPANY appears below:
GFK-0361
Chapter 2 Getting Started
2-7
2
’100 - Text file
CLEAR SCREEN
MOVE TO 5, 10
QUAD SIZE
DISPLAY ”100”
BRIGHT
/DIM
MOVE TO 10, 10
DISPLAY ”YOUR COMPANY”
EXIT QUAD
_
END
Information about the individual commands helps you understand the purpose of
this file:
D
The first line, ’100 - Text file, demonstrates a comment line. Starting a line with
an apostrophe (the character two keys to the right of the L key) makes any line a
comment, or a remark, for the OptiSCREEN file. Comments help document the
purpose of commands and statements in individual files. Also, when you make
the first statement of a screen file a comment, the comment identifies the file
when you generate a file directory.
D
The CLEAR SCREEN command clears the entire Mini OIT screen and resets all
attributes. You see this command at the beginning of files and whenever you
want to ”start fresh” in a system.
D
The MOVE TO 5, 10 and the MOVE TO 10, 10 commands cause the text or
graphics that follow to appear in a specified location. The first MOVE command
starts the display of text at row 5 and column 10 on the screen. The second
command starts the display of text at row 10 and column 10. A Mini OIT
includes 16 rows, numbered from the top of the screen to the bottom. It
includes 80 columns, numbered from the left side of the screen to the right.
D
The QUAD SIZE and EXIT QUAD command pair are ”character attribute
commands.” They affect the appearance of all text that falls between the two
commands. In general, a character fills a single cell so that it appears one row
tall and one column wide. A quad size character appears four rows tall and four
columns wide. Quad size characters appear in an uppercase (capitalized) form
only.
D
The DISPLAY command specifies the text that appears on the screen. The first
DISPLAY command specifies the number and name of the file, ”100,” and the
second specifies the name of ”YOUR COMPANY.” As noted above, quad size
characters appear in uppercase only, so you must enter capitalized text.
D
Like QUAD SIZE, the BRIGHT and /DIM commands are character attribute
commands; they affect the appearance of all text and graphics that fall after the
commands. In this case, BRIGHT specifies that the text and graphics appear in
bright mode on the screen; /DIM specifies that the text and graphics appear on a
dim background.
D
The system automatically places the required END command on the screen.
When you display the screen file again, the system deletes the blank line before
the END command.
As you entered these commands, you may have noticed some interesting things:
2-8
Mini Operator Interface Termainal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
2
D
The system automatically capitalizes the commands for you when you press the
[Enter] key to move to a new line. It does not, however, capitalize text that
appears within quotes.
5.
D
When you press the [Enter] key, the system also correctly spells out commands
that you abbreviated or misspelled as you entered them.
D
You can use the cursor control keys to move through the screen file and make
corrections to the text.
D
You can press the [Ctrl]-Ins key combination to insert a new, blank line into the
middle of the file.
D
You can press the [Ctrl]-Del function key to delete the line that the cursor
currently covers in the file.
D
You can press the [Ins] key to change from replacement, or overwrite, mode to
insertion mode and add new text to the file. In insertion mode, existing text
shifts to the right to make room for the new text.
D
You can press the [Del] key to delete the character that the cursor currently
covers.
D
If you enter the first character or characters of a screen command and then
pause before completing the command, the system displays a help screen that
outlines the syntax for the commands that begin with the letter or letters you’ve
entered.
To display the screen file on the Mini OIT, press the [F6] SHOW function key:
100
YOUR COMPANY
This shows how the screen appears when you call it from an external device or call it
from another program.
6.
Press the [F5] EDIT function key to return to the screen file for further editing:
’Test1 - Text file
CLEAR SCREEN
MOVE TO 5, 10
QUAD SIZE
DISPLAY ”100”
BRIGHT
/DIM
MOVE TO 10, 10
DISPLAY ”YOUR COMPANY”
EXIT QUAD
END
GFK-0361
Chapter 2 Getting Started
2-9
2
At this point, you can add commands to the screen file or you can make changes to
the existing commands in the screen file. Press the [F6] SHOW function key to
display the screen again, and press the [F5] EDIT key to return to the screen file for
further editing.
7.
To save the screen file, first return to the OptiSCREEN Editor menu. If you are
displaying a screen file or editing the screen program this is done by pressing the
[F1] UTIL key.
There are a number keys you can press to initiate the ”Save” operation. If you wish
to exit the OptiSCREEN Editor after saving, press the [F2] EXIT key. If you wish to
edit a different screen file after saving, press the number 1.
After the ”Save” operation is initiated, prompts as shown below will appear. SAVE
EDITED CHANGES? (Y or N). Press Y to save or N if you do not want to save the
file.
After edits to a screen file have been saved, the following message appears,
CHANGE FILE NUMBER? (Y or N). If Y is pressed, the message, TYPE NEW FILE
NUMBER, appears. When the new file number has been entered, it flashes
COMPLETED and returns to the Configuration menu. The old file remains in the
directory in the same form it had before being edited.
The file name is an optional part of the screen file. To name a file, enter the file name
as a comment on the first line of the screen file. To rename the file, simply change
the name in the first line.
8.
Press the [F1] UTIL function key to return to the OptiSCREEN Editor menu. Then
press the number 5, Print Directory, to see that the screen file 100 is in the directory.
You are now ready to create another screen file or perform another function.
Creating a Graphic Screen
The first screen file that you created showed two lines of text. In this example you create
a simple graphic display.
2-10
1.
Look in the directory for a file named 110. Do this in the same manner as before in
the section, Creating a Text Screen File. If the file does not exist, move to step 2. If
the file exists, delete it.
2.
If the file number 110 does not exist, press 1, Select edit file from the OptiSCREEN
editor menu.
3.
Enter 110 at the prompt ”Type file number:” The screen file editor places you in an
empty screen. Enter the following commands to generate the screen file:
Mini Operator Interface Termainal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
2
’110 - Graphic file
MOVE TO 10, 10
BOX 8 x 8
UP 5
RIGHT 1
SUPPLEMENTAL
DISPLAY ”bpoopc”
LEFT 6
DOWN 1
DISPLAY ”|”
DOWN 1
LEFT 1
DISPLAY ”erssrd”
LEFT 1
UP 1
DISPLAY ”}”
EXIT SUPPLEMENTAL
END
Several new commands and different uses of old commands appear in this example:
D
The BOX command draws a box on the screen. In this case, the box is 8 rows tall
and 8 columns wide. The system draws boxes from the lower left-hand corner
of the box. That is, you use the MOVE TO command to move to a specific
location on the screen, and the BOX command draws up a specified number of
rows and to the right a specified number of columns.
D
The UP command moves the cursor up a specified number of columns. In this
case, the cursor moves up 5 rows. OptiSCREEN also offers a RIGHT command,
an UP command, and a DOWN command.
D
The lowercase letters in the DISPLAY commands appears as supplemental
graphic characters rather than a text character. In this example these characters
form a circle with the box.
4.
To display the screen file on the Mini OIT, press the [F6] SHOW function key.
5.
Press the [F5] EDIT key to return to the screen file for further editing. At this point,
you can make changes to the existing commands in the screen file.
6.
Save the screen file in the same manner as described before in the section, Creating a
Text Screen File.
Changing a Screen File from Absolute to Relative
In this part of ”Getting Started,” you change screen file 110 to make it a relative screen
file. (Descriptions of ”absolute” and ”relative” files appear below.) In the next part of
this chapter, you use the changed relative screen file.
GFK-0361
1.
Call up the file 110 you created in the previous section by entering the Select Edit
File function from the OptiSCREEN Editor menu.
2.
Delete the second line in the file (MOVE TO 10, 10). To do this, move the cursor to
the second line and press the [Ctrl]-Del key combination. After the deletion, the file
looks like this:
Chapter 2 Getting Started
2-11
2
’110 - Graphic file
BOX 8 x 8
UP 5
RIGHT 1
SUPPLEMENTAL
DISPLAY ”bpoopc”
LEFT 6
DOWN 1
DISPLAY ”|”
DOWN 1
LEFT 1
DISPLAY ”erssrd”
LEFT 1
UP 1
DISPLAY ”}”
EXIT SUPPLEMENTAL
END
This is now a relative graphic screen file. The commands in the file do not display
the output from the file in an absolute position; the commands display the output in
any location that you specify. Notice that the file does not contain the CLEAR
SCREEN command but contains both the SUPPLEMENTAL and EXIT
SUPPLEMENTAL commands.
An example of how to display this relative file appears in the next section of this
chapter.
3.
Save the file as described before in the section, Creating a Text Screen File.
You can now generate the screen file that calls the relative screen file.
Calling a Screen File from Another Screen File
In this section of the chapter, you call the relative screen file that you just created from
another screen file.
1.
Look in the directory for file number 120. If the file does not exist, move to step 2. If
the file exists, delete it as described before.
2.
Enter the Select Edit File function from the OptiSCREEN Editor and type in the file
number, 120, at the prompt.
3.
The screen file editor places you in an empty screen. Enter the following commands
to generate the screen file:
’120 - Calling another screen file
CLEAR SCREEN
BRIGHT
MOVE TO 10, 10
DISPLAY FILE 110
NORMAL
MOVE TO 10, 20
DISPLAY FILE 110
DIM
MOVE TO 10, 30
DISPLAY FILE 110
_
END
The DISPLAY FILE command in this screen file causes the system to display the
contents of screen file 110 in the locations, and in the modes, that you specify.
2-12
Mini Operator Interface Termainal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
2
4.
To display the screen file at your Mini OIT, press the [F6] SHOW function key. Note
the location and brightness of the graphics as they appear on the screen.
5.
Press the [F5] EDIT function key to return to the screen file for further editing. At
this point, you can make changes to the commands in the screen file.
6.
Save the File as described before.
Programming the Touch Screen
This section of the ”Getting Started” chapter is designed for users with a touch screen on
their Mini OIT. In this section, you create a screen file which includes OptiTOUCH
commands. Skip this section of the chapter if your Mini OIT does not offer a touch
screen.
Configuring the Mini OIT
To make the touch screen functional, you must use the Configuration Menu to specify
that you want to use KEY CODES 5 for programming the touch screen.
To do this return to the section, ”Using the Configuration Menu,” in this section.
Determining the Touch Screen Layout
In this example, you create two large interactive boxes on the touch screen. The
programmable touch screen offers boxes in the following positions:
+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1 |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
7 |
8 |
9 | 1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| 31 | 32 | 33 | 34 | 35 | 36 | 37 | 38 | 39 | 40 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+
This is the touch screen keyboard layout that you use in this example:
+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+------+------+
A
+------+------+
B
+------+------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+
GFK-0361
Chapter 2 Getting Started
2-13
2
Creating the OptiSCREEN File
1.
Look in the directory for file number 130. If the file does not exist, move to step 2. If
the file exists, delete it as described before.
2.
Enter the Select Edit File function from the OptiSCREEN Editor and type in the file
number, 130, at the prompt.
3.
The screen file editor places you in an empty screen. Enter the following commands
to generate the screen file:
’Mytouch - File for two-box touch screen demo
CLEAR SCREEN
CLEAR KEY TABLE
MAKE TOUCH BOX 4 AT LOCATION 23 WITH VALUE 65
MAKE TOUCH BOX 4 AT LOCATION 27 WITH VALUE 66
END
The CLEAR KEY TABLE command in this screen file eliminates previous
specifications. The MAKE TOUCH BOX commands in this screen file define the size
of the touch boxes (BOX style number 4 out of eight different box formats), the
”beginning location” of the touch box (LOCATION 33 and LOCATION 37, as shown
above) and the ASCII value for the output (ASCII code 65 for the letter ”A” and 66
for the letter ”B”). For more information see the MAKE TOUCH BOX command in
Chapter 5.
4.
Display the screen with the [F4] SHOW function key. Although nothing happens,
you can press one of the on-screen keys you just defined.
Creating a Sample Screen Format
A sample screen format is shown in the figure below. The sample format can be created
by typing in the program which is listed after the figure. The format includes a variety
of OptiSCREEN statements to help you become familiar with the overall characteristics
of screen programming.
To execute the sample screen that follows, select keyboard type 5 from the Configuration
menu if you have the touch screen model. If you do not have the touch screen (Mini
OIT-Touch), select the type you would be using for normal operations.
Note
A screen may not be displayed correctly if the configuration settings
when it was created are different from when it is recalled: for example, if
type 5 keyboard is selected at the time of creation and type 1 is selected
when recalled. If the configuration needs to be changed while on-line, be
sure to reset it to the proper state before displaying a new screen.
2-14
Mini Operator Interface Termainal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
2
a42838
AUTO-PLATER
SELECT FUNCTION
F1
F1 Hoist Control
F2 Rectifier Control
RUN TIME
Today
Week
FAULTS
F2
Today
Week
Figure 2-4. Sample Screen Format
The Sample Program
Comments explaining how the sample program works are included in the listing. The
recommended method for entering the program is as follows.
1.
Enter a single block of program lines at a time; the blocks are separated in the listing
by a blank comment line.
2.
After entering a block of lines, press the [F6] VIEW Function key to display the part
of the program entered. To study how the program is working, switch back and
forth between the display of the screen and its program by alternately pressing [F6]
VIEW and [F5] EDIT.
3.
Re-enter Edit, type in the next block of lines, and repeat the procedure above.
’Sample Screen File
’ CLEAR KEY TABLE
RESET LINE ATTRIBUTES
CLEAR SCREEN
’
MOVE TO 7, 1
BOX 7 X 80
MOVE TO 5, 5
QUAD SIZE
DISPLAY ”AUTO-PLATER”
EXIT QUAD
’
MOVE TO 2, 59
DISPLAY ”______________”
MOVE TO 3, 64
DISPLAY ”|”
SUPPLEMENTAL
MOVE TO 2, 61
DISPLAY ”~pp~”
MOVE TO 4, 59
DISPLAY ”lklklklklklklk”
MOVE TO 5, 59
DISPLAY ”mjmjmjmjmjmjmj”
EXIT SUPPLEMENTAL
’
MOVE TO 16, 1
BOX 8 X 40
MOVE TO 10, 2
DOUBLE WIDE
GFK-0361
Chapter 2 Getting Started
This is the Screen Title.
Use clear key table only if
using touch screen.
These statements draw the box
for the screen heading and
display the words AUTO-PLATER
in Quad size letters.
These statements draw the
symbol for the Auto-Plater
using normal ASCII characters
and characters in the Supplemental character set. Be sure
to note that the Supplemental
character set letters are lower
case.
These statements make up the
Select Function area. The
DOUBLE WIDE, BRIGHT, AND BLINK
Commands are used to emphasize
2-15
2
BRIGHT
the action to be taken.
BLINK
DISPLAY ”SELECT FUNCTION”
EXIT DOUBLE WIDE AND BLINK
RESET ATTRIBUTES
MOVE TO 12, 5
DISPLAY ”F1 Hoist Control”
MOVE TO 14, 5
DISPLAY ”F2 Rectifier Control”
’
REVERSED
These statements construct the
MAKE TOUCH BOX 1 AT LOCATION 25 WITH VALUE 66 touch boxes for sending the
MAKE TOUCH BOX 1 AT LOCATION 35 WITH VALUE 67 selection back to the host. If
DOUBLE WIDE
you do not have the touch screen
MOVE TO 10, 35
you will not include the touch
DISPLAY ”F1”
box commands, but will use keys
MOVE TO 14, 35
on an attached keyboard to
DISPLAY ”F2”
select a function.
RESET ATTRIBUTES
’
MOVE TO 16, 43
These statements form the
BOX 8 X 38
Display RUN TIME and FAULTS area
MOVE TO 10, 45
of the screen.
DOUBLE WIDE
BRIGHT
DISPLAY ”RUN TIME”
MOVE TO 14, 45
DISPLAY ”FAULTS”
RESET ATTRIBUTES
SUPPLEMENTAL
MOVE TO 10, 63
DISPLAY ”~”
MOVE TO 11, 63
DISPLAY ”~”
MOVE TO 14, 63
DISPLAY ”~”
MOVE TO 15, 63
DISPLAY ”~”
EXIT SUPPLEMENTAL
MOVE TO 10, 65
DISPLAY ”Today”
MOVE TO 11, 65
DISPLAY ”Week”
MOVE TO 14, 65
DISPLAY ”Today”
MOVE TO 15, 65
DISPLAY ”Week”
’
/DIM
These statements are part of the
MOVE TO 10, 72
Data Fill operations explained
DISPLAY ”{ENQ}{ENQ}{ENQ}{ENQ}{ENQ}”
in Section 2 of this chapter.
MOVE TO 11, 72
The Data Fill operations are
DISPLAY ”{ENQ}{ENQ}{ENQ}{ENQ}{ENQ}”
used to make it easier for the
MOVE TO 14, 74
host to place dynamic data in
DISPLAY ”{ENQ}{ENQ}{ENQ}”
different locations on the
MOVE TO 15, 74
screen. The /DIM command is
DISPLAY ”{ENQ}{ENQ}{ENQ}”
only included here to show where
’
data from the host will be
END
displayed. Normally, the Data
Fill statements would be a
separate file from the rest of
the screen. See Data Fill
operations in Section 2.
Now That You’ve Started
This chapter outlined a number of the basic capabilities of the Mini OIT. The rest of this
manual expands on the information presented here:
2-16
Mini Operator Interface Termainal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
2
GFK-0361
D
Chapter 3 of this manual, ”Installation,” describes the physical and electrical
requirements of the Mini OIT.
D
Chapter 4, ”Operation,” describes menus and screens that the system provides, and
outlines the steps you take to use the system.
D
Chapter 5, ”OptiSCREEN Command Reference,” completely describes the
OptiSCREEN commands.
D
The appendixes found at the end of this guide contain information about the
physical measurements of the Mini OIT and symbols available in the system.
Chapter 2 Getting Started
2-17
Chapter
3 Installation
3
section level 1 1
figure bi level 1
table_big level 1
This chapter describes in detail all hardware-related topics for the Mini OIT. Topics
covered in this chapter are:
D
Mounting the Mini OIT
D
Rear Panel Connections
D
AC Power
D
Battery Replacement
D
Serial and Parallel Ports
D
Installing Memory
D
CRT Adjustment
Mounting the Mini OIT
Install your Mini OIT in an industrial rack or in a special panel cutout for the unit. When
properly mounted, the Mini OIT maintains its NEMA 4 and NEMA 12 ratings.
Refer to Appendix A for the required panel cutout and mounting holes for installing the
Mini OIT. The Mini OIT uses 10-32 mounting studs.
Caution
To avoid damaging the studs and the front panel, do not over-tighten
the nuts on the mounting studs. This damage is not covered by the
warranty.
You should keep the Mini OIT box and packing materials so that you can use them if the
unit ever needs to be shipped again.
Rear Panel Connections
The lower rear of the OIT chassis contains all the connections you need during
installation.
GFK-0361
3-1
3
a42843
BATTERY AND CONNECTIONS BEHIND THIS PANEL
AC POWER
O
P
W
N
R
L
L
G
OFF
AC
2 POWER
1
BRIGHTNESS
PARALLEL I/O PORT
PARALLEL KEYBOARD SERIAL KEYBOARD
PRIMARY DTE
POWER
SWITCH
Figure 3-1. Rear View of the Mini OIT
Note
Located on the bottom of the Mini OIT is an 8-position DIP switch. At
this time no user options are associated with this switch, and all
positions should be left in the ON position.
A description of each of the items shown here appears in this chapter.
AC Power
You must supply your own AC power cord to attach power to the Mini OIT. The Mini
OIT is designed to operate at 120 Volts AC, 60 Hz. The three terminals use the following
designations.
Terminal
Wire
L1
L2
L3
Hot
Neutral
Ground
Caution
Applying 220 Volts AC damages this unit and voids the user warranty.
Make sure that the voltage corresponds to the voltage requirement
indicated on the identification label located on the rear panel of the
unit. Consult the factory if you require a different voltage.
3-2
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
3
Battery Replacement
The Mini OIT uses a lithium battery to maintain the user memory for screens and data
files. The battery has a nominal shelf life of five years and maintains the user memory
for up to a year depending upon the amount of memory installed.
Warning
Lithium batteries cannot be recharged. Do not discard the lithium
battery in fire. Do not short the battery. The battery may burn or
release hazardous materials if damaged. Replace the battery with an
identical lithium battery.
The battery assembly consists of a battery with a short cable and a mating connector.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
a44157
Figure 3-2. Battery Assembly
To replace a battery in the Mini OIT, perform the following steps. Unlike the battery
installation procedure you do have to remove the bottom panel of the chassis to replace
the battery.
1.
Unplug the Mini OIT from the main power source.
Warning
High voltages are present in the terminal while power is connected,
even if the unit is turned off.
2.
Place the Mini OIT face down on a non-abrasive surface. Position the unit so the
bottom is facing you.
3.
Locate and remove the 10 screws holding the bottom panel of the chassis.
4.
There are two ribbon cables that connect the bottom chassis to the top chassis.
Unplug the ribbon cables, noting their proper location and orientation for later
reinstallation.
5.
Lower the bottom chassis.
6.
Two clips hold the old battery to the back of the battery coverplate. Disconnect the
old battery from the clips on the battery coverplate.
7.
A pair of two-position connections exist inside the battery coverplate opening on the
main logic board. The old battery is attached to one of the two-position connections.
While the old battery remains attached, connect the new battery to the two unused
battery connectors on the logic board. Be sure to use the notches on the battery
GFK-0361
Chapter 3 Installation
3-3
3
connector to install the battery with the correct polarity. Assuming that the old
battery retains some power, this ”double battery” allows you to save any data in
user memory.
8.
Remove the old battery from the battery connector on the logic board.
9.
Install the new battery in the clips on the battery coverplate.
10. Reconnect the ribbon cables and reinstall the bottom panel of the chassis.
ÎÎ
LOGIC
BOARD
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
a44780
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
BATTERY
CLIPS
(QTY 2)
Figure 3-3. Replacing the Battery
DIP SWITCHES
The bank of dip switches located on the underside of the Mini OIT terminal has the
following meanings. Note that definitions for switches 2 and 3 are new as of the new
firmware release 2.5-31; the definitions for switches 1 and 8 remain as previously
defined.
SW#
OFF
Default
1
No test
Automatic manufacturing test
ON
2
IC600KD515A
IC600KD515B or later
OFF
IC600KD516A
IC600KD516B or later
Keyboard configuration (only)
Touch screen configuration
OFF
Not used
Not used
ON
No key repeat
Automatic key repeat
ON
3
4-7
8
ON
Serial and Parallel Ports
This section provides a description of the serial and parallel ports of the Mini OIT.
Explanations of port operations are also included. The topics covered are:
D
D
D
Port Configurations
Serial Port Description
Parallel Port Description
Port Configurations
There are two ports on the Mini OIT: a serial port and a parallel port. These ports have
five different configurations in which they can be used. These configurations are
selected from the Configuration menu. The five configurations are:
3-4
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
3
D
D
D
D
D
Serial port is primary.
Parallel port is primary.
Both ports are primary.
Easy Display
User Programmable
Serial Port is Primary. This is the most common mode of operation for the Mini OIT.
Use this configuration when your application requires operator input (two way
communications). The serial port is connected to the host using RS-232 or RS-422
connections. The host transmits characters or escape commands to the Mini OIT. When
a sealed membrane keyboard or a full travel keyboard is plugged into the Mini OIT,
characters can be transmitted back to the host device. Also, characters can be
transmitted from the parallel port. All characters transmitted to the parallel port will be
ignored.
A practical application using this operating mode is to connect the Mini OIT’s serial port
to an intelligent host such as a PLC ASCII/BASIC module. Operator input can be
achieved using the touch screen keyboard on the Mini OIT or adding a sealed
membrane keyboard. Also with this configuration, a parallel printer can be added.
Parallel Port is Primary. In this configuration, the Mini OIT is connected to the host
through the parallel port. The Mini OIT’s parallel port can be connected to a host in one
of two ways. It can be connected to the host’s parallel port, or it can be connected to a
host through a 5 volt TTL DC output module such as that found on a PLC. Characters
can be transmitted from the serial port. All characters transmitted to the serial port will
be ignored.
Parallel and Serial Port are Primary. In this configuration both the serial port and the
parallel ports can receive characters. Any characters entered on a touch screen,
membrane keyboard, or full-travel keyboard are simultaneously transmitted out both
the serial and parallel ports. Because the parallel port requires handshaking signals to be
used, this mode with both ports considered to be the primary port should not be used if
the device connected on the parallel port is not capable of receiving data.
Easy Display. This configuration is specifically designed so that the Mini OIT can be
used as an intelligent stored message display with a parallel interface. The parallel port
is connected to the host through a parallel cable. This configuration allows a
programmable controller, using only discrete outputs, to initiate the display of screen
files on the screen. In addition to displaying stored screen files, alpha-numeric
information, binary, or binary coded decimal (BCD) numbers may also be sent to a
printer or any other device that has a parallel input port.
User Programmable. In this configuration the Mini OIT can be programmed by the user
to select the I/O status of all 16 parallel signal lines. Each line can be either turned on or
off at the command of the operator or host device. Contact GE Fanuc Automation for
further information.
When the parallel port is used, the Mini OIT will place the data being sent on the port,
toggle the strobe handshaking line, and then wait for the acknowledgement signal to
toggle. If the Mini OIT sends a character when the host device or peripheral is not
operation, it will wait indefinitely for the acknowledgement signal. The user must
ensure that either the parallel device connected to the Mini OIT toggles this signal on
power-up so that it is able to resume sending new data, or that the Mini OIT is reset
whenever any parallel device is turned on. The Mini OIT can be reset through the
escape sequence Esc c.
GFK-0361
Chapter 3 Installation
3-5
3
Serial Port Description
The pin definitions for the serial port connector are listed below. An illustration of the
25-pin connector is also shown:
PIN 1
PIN 13
PIN 14
PIN 25
a44159
Figure 3-4. Serial Port Using DB-25P Male Connector
Pin
Connection
1
2
3
4 (a)
5 (b)
6
7
8
9 (c)
10
11
12
13
Notes:
Protective(chassis) ground
Data Out, RS-232C
Data In, RS-232C
RTS (Request To Send) output
CTS (Clear To Send) input
no connection
Signal Ground
no connection
Terminate RX, RS-422
Data In (+), RD(B), RS-422
Data Out (+), SD(B), RS-422
no connection
no connection
Pin
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 (d)
21
22
23
24
25
Connection
no connection
no connection
no connection
no connection
no connection
no connection
DTR (Data Terminal Ready) out
no connection
Data In (-), RD(A), RS-422
Data Out (-), SD(A), RS-422
no connection
Terminate RX, RS-422
(a) Asserted when input buffer space available.
(b) Must be asserted to allow output if you use hardware handshaking. Pin 5 on the serial port is
used for hardware handshaking during RS-232C operation. If the host equipment does not
support the use of this signal and if software handshaking is not selected, then you must connect
pin 5 to pin 20 at the Mini OIT’s connector.
(c) Must be connected to pin 25 for point-to-point operation or if this Mini OIT falls at the end of a
multidrop line.
(d) Asserted when Mini OIT has power.
Serial Port Operations
The 25-pin D-connector on the rear of the unit conforms to RS-232C standards. These
standards define an asynchronous serial interface, its impedances, and its physical
connectors. RS-232C standards place all equipment into one of two general categories:
D
DTE, or Data Terminal Equipment, includes most terminals, printers, and other
peripherals. DTE devices are commonly called ”data terminals.”
D
DCE, or Data Communications Equipment, includes many computers and modems.
DCE devices are commonly called ”data sets.”
The differences between a data terminal and a data set emerge when referring to each
device’s input and output connectors, such as the signals labeled ”transmitted data” and
”received data.”
3-6
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
3
A cable wired to a DTE at one end and to a DCE at the other end allows all necessary
wires to match pin-for-pin at each end. When you connect a DTE device to another DTE
device, or you connect a DCE to a DCE, you must cross one or more pairs of signals for
proper operation:
The serial port is configured as a DTE port with signals as shown above. Make sure that
your host is either a DCE device or that the connecting cable makes the required signal
pair crossovers.
With RS-232C operation, when you connect a DTE device to a DTE device, or a DCE
device to a DCE device, the signals on pins 2 and 3 must be cross connected; for example,
pin 2 at one device must be connected to pin 3 at the other. Any required handshaking
signals must also be cross connected.
The RS-232 standard defines a number of signals in addition to transmitted and received
data. Few devices require all signals to be used, and most require only a few signals.
Refer to your host equipment manual for additional information about pins and
required signals.
Handshaking with RS-232C Signals
The Mini OIT offers a 256-character input FIFO (first in, first out) buffer for receiving and
holding characters until the Mini OIT processes them. In some cases, the FIFO buffer is
filled faster than the Mini OIT processes the characters.
”Handshaking” allows the receiving device to direct the sending device to stop
transmitting data so that the buffer does not overflow. Generally, you are only required
to use handshaking at a rate greater than 9600 baud. Two modes of handshaking,
software or hardware, can be selected through system configuration.
Software handshaking occurs as follows:
1.
When the FIFO buffer receives 128 characters, the Mini OIT sends XOFF, or [Ctrl]-S,
to the host computer as a message to stop transmitting. The system loses incoming
characters only after the FIFO buffer receives 256 characters.
2.
When the Mini OIT processes enough characters so that only 64 characters remain in
the FIFO buffer, the OIT sends XON, or [Ctrl]-Q, to the host computer to indicate
that it is ready to accept more characters.
You can enable or disable software handshaking via software. On initial power-up, the
system disables software handshaking. After you select software handshaking, XON or
XOFF codes from the host control the flow of data from the OIT.
The Mini OIT handles hardware handshaking with the following signals:
D
The Mini OIT uses the RTS (Request To Send output) signal on pin 4 of the RS-232
interface to indicate when the FIFO buffer can accept additional characters.
D
The host asserts the CTS (Clear To Send) signal on pin 5 before the OIT transmits
any data.
D
The Mini OIT always asserts the DTR (Data Terminal Ready output) signal on pin 20
when power is on.
For either hardware or software handshaking, the host computer must be set up to
handle the handshaking information. If the host computer does not support
handshaking signals, set the Mini OIT for hardware handshaking, and jumper the DTR
GFK-0361
Chapter 3 Installation
3-7
3
output (pin 20) to the CTS input (pin 5) on the Mini OIT. Then, the host ignores the RTS
signal from the Mini OIT. The Mini OIT cannot control the flow of data from the host in
this situation, so the application program must be written to ensure that the input buffer
on the Mini OIT does not overflow.
Handshaking with RS-422 Signals
The Mini OIT does not support the hardware handshaking signals described above as
equivalent RS-422 signals. With RS-422 signals, the Mini OIT supports software
handshaking when you select it. You should select hardware handshaking if the host
supports no handshaking; also you should install jumpers as shown in the wiring
diagrams for RS-422 Point-to-Point connections.
Do not to connect both RS-232 and RS-422 inputs on the serial port. You can, however,
use both RS-232 and RS-422 outputs on the serial port. To use both outputs, make sure
that extra signals from the host equipment are not connected to RS-422 pins during
RS-232C operation and, similarly, that extra signals from the host equipment are not
connected to RS-232C pins during RS-422 operation. Refer to the information under the
”Multidrop Operations” heading below for information on the use of the Mini OIT using
a multidrop RS-422 network.
You must connect RS-422 receiver termination pins at the Mini OIT when using it in a
point-to-point configuration. In multidrop configurations, you must connect the
termination pins at the Mini OIT farthest from the host:
D
You can use the Mini OIT’s internal termination resistors by connecting pin 9 to pin
25.
D
You can use or may be required to use external termination resistors for proper
RS-422 operation. External termination resistors are nominally 100 ohms,
depending on cable characteristics. At the Mini OIT, connect a resistor between pin
10 and pin 22. At the host, connect a resistor between its Data In(+)RD(B) and Data
In(-)RD(A) pins.
Consult your host equipment supplier for additional information.
Serial Cable and Connector Specifications
The following list provides the specifications for the construction of cables to connect the
Mini OIT to a host device:
D
Cable connector to serial port: Female, D-subminiature type, Cannon DB-25S with
DB110963-3 hood or equivalent (standard RS-232C connector).
D
Maximum cable length: 50 feet (15 meters) for RS-232C; 4000 feet (1200 meters) for
RS-422.
D
Overall shield: Recommended. Tie the shield to the chassis ground at one end only.
See the wiring diagrams below for more information.
D
D
Minimum wire specification: 24 AWG.
Cable recommendations: The Belden 9184, the Belden 9302, and the NEC
222P1SLCBT cables provide acceptable operation at data rates of up to 19.2K baud
and distances of up to 4000 feet for RS-422 ports.
Refer to your application or device manual for additional information about connections
to the host or peripherals.
3-8
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
3
When using the RS-422 port, you should match the twisted pairs so that both transmit
signals make up one twisted pair and both receive signals make up the other twisted
pair. If you ignore this crossover, cross talk affecting the performance of the
communication system can result from the mismatching.
Caution
When routing communications cables outdoors, use transient
suppression devices to reduce the possibility of damage due to
lightning or static discharge.
Also, make sure that both the OIT and the host device to which the
Mini OIT is connected are grounded to a common point. Failure to
provide a ground can result in serious damage to the equipment if the
potential exceeds the isolation voltage rating of the equipment.
Typical Serial Cable Wiring Configurations
This section contains serial cable wiring diagrams for the Mini OIT:
GFK-0361
D
The diagrams do not cover all possible configurations; but by using the Mini OIT
port connector definitions and the manual for the DTE or DCE device connected to
your Mini OIT, you should be able to configure the cable for your application.
D
All signals, with the exception of the protective ground, are optically isolated from
the Mini OIT internal logic.
Chapter 3 Installation
3-9
3
The diagrams appear below:
MINI
OIT
(DTE)
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
Î
Î
Î
Î
PIN
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DTR
GND
PIN
2
3
4
5
20
7
3
2
5
4
8
7
25- PIN
FEMALE
RXD
TXD
CTS
RTS
DCD
GND
25- PIN
MALE
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
a44764
SERIES SIX
ASCII/BASIC
MODULE
(DTE)
PORT 2
25- PIN
FEMALE
Figure 3-5. RS-232C Point-to-Point Communication with Handshaking
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series Six ASCII/BASIC Module Port 2)
MINI
OIT
(DTE)
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
Î
Î
Î
Î
PIN
PIN
2
3
5
8
20
7
3
2
15
16
TXD
RXD
CTS
DCD
DTR
GND
IF PORT 1,
MUST BE CONNECTED
(SEE ASCII/BASIC MANUAL)
RXD
TXD
GND
7
25- PIN
FEMALE
25- PIN
MALE
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
a44765
SERIES SIX
ASCII/BASIC
MODULE
(DTE)
PORT1 OR
PORT 2
25- PIN
FEMALE
Figure 3-6. RS-232C Point-to-Point Communication, No Handshaking
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series Six ASCII/BASIC Module Port 1 or Port 2)
MINI
OIT
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
PIN
PIN
TERMRX
TERMRX
RTS
DCD
GND
SD (A)
SD (B)
RD (A)
RD (B)
9
25
4
8
7
23
11
22
10
25- PIN
FEMALE
a44766
GND
7
23
11
22
10
RXD
RXD
TXD
TXD
25- PIN
MALE
CHASSIS GROUND
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
a44766
SERIES SIX
ASCII/BASIC
MODULE
25- PIN
FEMALE
Figure 3-7. RS-422 Point-to-Point Communication
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Port to Series Five ASCII/BASIC Module Port 1 or Port 2)
MINI
OIT
(DTE)
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
TXD
RXD
CTS
DCD
DTR
GND
PIN
PIN
2
3
5
8
20
7
3
2
4
5
*
7
RXD
TXD
GND
9- PIN
MALE
25- PIN
FEMALE
*
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
a44767
SERIES FIVE
ASCII/BASIC
MODULE
(DTE)
PORT1 OR
PORT 2
9- PIN
FEMALE
INSTALL FOR PORT 2 ONLY OF SERIES FIVE ABM MODULE
Figure 3-8. RS-232C Point-to-Point Communication, No Handshaking
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series Five ASCII/BASIC Module Port 2)
3-10
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
3
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
PIN
SD (A)
SD (B)
RD (A)
RD (B)
GND
TERMRX
TERMRX
MINI
OIT
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
*
PIN
23
11
22
10
7
9
25
4
8
5
20
9
8
6
1
7
RXD
RXD
TXD
TXD
GND
9- PIN
MALE
25- PIN
FEMALE
Î
Î
Î
Î
a44768
SERIES
FIVE
ASCII/BASIC
MODULE
PORT 2
9- PIN
FEMALE
* EXTERNAL 150 0HM RESISTOR
Figure 3-9. RS-422 Point-to-Point Communication, No Handshaking
(Mini OIT Serial to Series 90-70 PCM Module Port 1 or Port 2)
MINI
OIT
(DTE)
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
PIN
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
GND
DTR
DCD
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
2
3
4
5
7
20
8
PIN
1
3
2
5
20
7
8
25- PIN
FEMALE
SHLD
RXD
TXD
CTS
DTR
GND
DCD
25- PIN
MALE
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
a44771
SERIES
90-70
PCM
(DTE)
PORT 1
OR
PORT 2
25- PIN
FEMALE
Figure 3-10. RS-232 Point-to-Point Communication with Handshaking
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series 90-70 PCM Module Port 1 or Port 2)
MINI
OIT
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
PIN
SD (A) 23
11
SD (B)
22
RD (A) 10
9
RD (B)
25
4
TERMRX
8
TERMRX
5
GND 20
7
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
PIN
24
13
25
9
21
10
11
12
22
23
7
1
25- PIN
FEMALE
TERM (RD)
RD (A)
RD (B)
SD (A)
SD (B)
RTS (A)
CTS (A)
TERM (CTS)
RTS (B)
CTS (B)
GND
SHLD
25- PIN
MALE
a44772
SERIES
90-70
PCM
PORT 1
OR
PORT 2
25- PIN
FEMALE
Figure 3-11. RS-422 Point-to-Point Communication with Handshaking
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series 90-30 PCM Module Port 1)
MINI
OIT
(DTE)
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
GND
DTR
DCD
25- PIN
FEMALE
PIN
2
3
4
5
7
20
8
PIN
1
3
2
5
20
7
8
SHLD
RXD
TXD
CTS
DTR
GND
DCD
25- PIN
MALE
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
a44773
SERIES
90-30
PCM
(DTE)
PORT 1
25- PIN
FEMALE
Figure 3-12. RS-232 Point-to-Point Communication with Handshaking
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series 90-30 PCM Module Port 2)
GFK-0361
Chapter 3 Installation
3-11
3
MINI
OIT
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
PIN
SD (A)
SD (B)
RD (A)
RD (B)
TERMRX
TERMRX
GND
23
11
22
10
9
25
4
8
5
20
7
PIN
24
13
25
9
21
10
11
12
22
23
7
1
25- PIN
FEMALE
TERM (RD)
RD (A)
RD (B)
SD (A)
SD (B)
RTS (A)
CTS (A)
TERM (CTS)
RTS (B)
CTS (B)
GND
SHLD
25- PIN
MALE
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
a44774
SERIES
90-30
PCM
PORT 2
25- PIN
FEMALE
Figure 3-13. RS-422 Point-to-Point Communication
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series 90-30 PCM Module Port 2)
Multidrop Operations
The Mini OIT is designed with RS-422 interfaces so that a number of units can be linked
on a multidrop line. Multidrop protocol messages are completely interrupt driven,
reducing the delay between the end of the message and the time that the Mini OIT
places its transmitter in a high impedance state. This permits a host to poll a number of
slaves with minimum delay between polls.
Configuring the Mini OIT
Once you select Multidrop operation in the Configuration Menu, the system requires you
to specify an address between 00 and 99. Although addresses may fall between 00 and
99, you are limited to a maximum of 16 slaves, depending on cable lengths, connection
quality, and the communications baud rate. The 00 to 99 address identifies one of the 16
Mini OITs for later operations. On power up, or when first selecting multidrop
operation, the OIT automatically disables itself from receiving or transmitting data.
When you select Multidrop operation in the Configuration Menu, the Mini OIT
automatically selects Software handshaking and Echo operation.
D
Software handshaking uses the XON (or DC1) and XOFF (or DC3) codes to prevent
transmission overruns. RS-422 multidrop operation requires this method since it
does not offer RTS and CTS signals. Also, RS-422 multidrop operation does not
allow the ”message data” to use the DC1 or DC3 codes.
D
Echo operation displays operator keystrokes on the screen immediately, even though
the host has not yet received the data.
D
For special requirements, or when the polling of Mini OITs takes place at high
speeds, No Echo operation can be used. The host, however, must select No Echo
mode by sending the Mini OIT the appropriate escape sequence.
You, the user, can select hardware handshaking. With the multidrop protocol, hardware
handshaking operates the same as no handshaking, allowing you to use the protocol
itself as a form of handshaking:
3-12
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
3
D
When the system polls a slave, the slave transmitter is enabled from the time the
system receives the address until the system receives the end of message code. If
the system receives the end of message code while the slave is still transmitting, the
system turns the slave transmitter off and the slave saves the remaining data in the
output buffer. When the slave receives the next polling message, it continues the
transmission.
D
In a single poll, the slave can transmit the same approximate number of characters as
the number of character frame times between the slave address and the end of
message code. At a minimum, this time is the same as the number of characters
transmitted as data from the host to the slave. The host may also designate a delay
between sending the slave address and the end of message code.
After configuring the Mini OIT with the communications specifications for your
application, enter into ONLINE mode.
Wiring for RS-422 Communications
You should make sure that extra signals from the host equipment are not connected to
RS-422 pins during RS-232C operation and, similarly, that extra signals from the host
equipment are not connected to RS-232C pins during RS-422 operation.
When a Mini OIT has not been selected during multidrop operation, its transmit signals
are put in a high-impedance state. The host computer may require you to connect
pull-up and pull-down resistors to its receive signals to avoid spurious data when no
Mini OIT has been selected for operation.
Support of RS-422 signals by a host device does not guarantee a multidrop
configuration. The host must be able to drive the receiving circuitry of all connected
devices. Moreover, to effectively support multiple Mini OITs, the host software must be
capable of polling and keeping track of communications with all the Mini OITs in an
orderly manner, and usually on a real-time basis. Consult the supplier of your host
device for additional information.
GFK-0361
Chapter 3 Installation
3-13
3
SERIES SIX
ASCII/BASIC
MODULE
25- PIN
MALE
MINI
OIT
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
MINI
OIT
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
a44775
PIN
RXD
RXD
TXD
TXD
GND
3
17
23
11
22
10
7
TERM RX
25- PIN
FEMALE
PIN
TERMRX
TERMRX
SD (A)
SD (B)
RD (A)
RD (B)
CTS
DTR
GND
9
25
23
11
22
10
5
20
7
NC
NC
25- PIN
FEMALE
PIN
TERMRX
TERMRX
SD (A)
SD (B)
RD (A)
RD (B)
CTS
DTR
GND
9
25
23
11
22
10
5
20
7
25- PIN
FEMALE
Figure 3-14. RS-422 Multidrop 2-Wire
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series Six ASCII/BASIC Module)
3-14
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
3
SERIES
FIVE
ASCII/BASIC
MODULE
PORT 1
OR
PORT 2
9- PIN
MALE
MINI
OIT
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
MINI
OIT
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
PIN
RXD
RXD
TXD
TXD
GND
*
a44778
9
8
6
1
7
9- PIN
FEMALE
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
PIN
SD (A)
SD (B)
RD (A)
RD (B)
TERMRX
TERMRX
GND
23
11
22
10
9
25
4
8
5
20
7
NC
NC
25- PIN
FEMALE
PIN
SD (A)
SD (B)
RD (A)
RD (B)
TERMRX
TERMRX
GND
25- PIN
FEMALE
23
11
22
10
9
25
4
8
5
20
7
* EXTERNAL 150 0HM
RESISTOR
Figure 3-15. RS-422 Multidrop 4-Wire
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series Five ASCII/BASIC Port 2)
GFK-0361
Chapter 3 Installation
3-15
3
SERIES
90-70
PCM
PORT 1
OR
PORT 2
25- PIN
MALE
MINI
OIT
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
MINI
OIT
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
a44776
PIN
RD (A)
RD (B)
TERM (RD)
SD (A)
SD (B)
RTS (A)
CTS (A)
TERM (CTS)
SHLD
RTS (B)
CTS (B)
GND
13
25
24
9
21
10
11
12
1
22
23
7
25- PIN
FEMALE
PIN
SD (A)
SD (B)
RD (A)
RD (B)
TERMRX
TERMRX
GND
23
11
22
10
9
25
4
8
5
20
7
NC
NC
25- PIN
FEMALE
PIN
SD (A)
SD (B)
RD (A)
RD (B)
TERMRX
TERMRX
GND
23
11
22
10
9
25
4
8
5
20
7
25- PIN
FEMALE
Figure 3-16. RS-422 Multidrop 4-Wire
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series 90-70 PCM Module 90-70 PCM Module Port 1 or Port 2)
3-16
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
3
SERIES
90-30
PCM
PORT 2
25- PIN
MALE
MINI
OIT
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
MINI
OIT
SERIAL
PORT
25- PIN
MALE
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
PIN
RD (A)
RD (B)
TERM (RD)
SD (A)
SD (B)
RTS (A)
CTS (A)
TERM (CTS)
SHLD
RTS (B)
CTS (B)
GND
a44777
13
25
24
9
21
10
11
12
1
22
23
7
25- PIN
FEMALE
PIN
SD (A)
SD (B)
RD (A)
RD (B)
TERMRX
TERMRX
GND
23
11
22
10
9
25
4
8
5
20
7
NC
NC
25- PIN
FEMALE
PIN
SD (A)
SD (B)
RD (A)
RD (B)
TERMRX
TERMRX
GND
23
11
22
10
9
25
4
8
5
20
7
25- PIN
FEMALE
Figure 3-17. RS-422 Multidrop 4-Wire
(Mini OIT Serial Port to Series 90-30 PCM Module Port 2)
How Multidrop Operation Works
A typical sequence for a host device to poll a series of RS-422 slaves appears below:
1.
To enable the Mini OIT for both transmission and reception, the host sends [Ctrl]-P
(Data Link Escape, or ASCII code 16) followed by the two digit address for the
desired Mini OIT. The address appears in standard ASCII format and uses two
digits; for example, the system addresses Mini OIT 5 as 05. For example, the host
transmits the following ASCII codes:
16 48 49
ASCII code 16 is [Ctrl]-P. ASCII code 48 is 0. ASCII code 49 is 1. This sequence
initiates communications with slave 1.
2.
GFK-0361
The system transmits the ”message string” to the host. The system displays
keyboard entries on the screen and stores them for subsequent transmission. The
system stores a maximum of 256 characters before it loses data. Once you select a
Mini OIT, any keyboard entries being stored are automatically transmitted as the
message string, and normal operation (as if point-to-point connection were in effect)
takes place between the host and the Mini OIT.
Chapter 3 Installation
3-17
3
3.
The host transmits a series of escape sequences to the slave.
4.
The host can subsequently disable a Mini OIT by sending [Ctrl]-W (End of
Transmission Block, or ASCII code 23). For example, two-way communication
continues until the hosts transmits the following ASCII code:
23
ASCII code 23 is [Ctrl]-W. This sequence ends communications with slave 1.
5.
Continuing, the host transmits the following ASCII codes:
16 48 50
ASCII code 16 is [Ctrl]-P. ASCII code 48 is 0. ASCII code 50 is 2. This sequence
initiates communications with slave 2.
And so on, until all of the multidrop devices have been polled.
The system automatically enables a Mini OIT with the address 00 to receive data
addressed to any Mini OIT, but the Mini OIT is not enabled to transmit unless the host
specifically transmits the 00 address. If the host transmits the address 00, all Mini OITs
are enabled to receive data, but only OIT 00 (if it exists) is enabled to transmit data.
Multiple Mini OITs may use the same address, but only one Mini OIT with the given
address may be electrically connected to transmit data.
Similarly, more than one address may be enabled at the same time. Simply transmit the
enabling code for an address (without an intervening [Ctrl]-W code), followed by the
message string for the address; then transmit the enabling code for an address, followed
by a message string, and so on. Again, however, only one Mini OIT may be electrically
connected for transmitting data.
The Mini OIT uses the control codes for enabling and disabling ports in the same
sequence as it does for all other commands and characters. Therefore, the system
processes all commands and characters it receives before it executes a command to
relinquish the multidrop link. Also, the host command to establish a new connection
cannot be sent until the Mini OIT relinquishes the previous connection. Therefore, you
may be required to specify a delay between turning off one Mini OIT and turning on
another to prevent more than one Mini OIT from operating simultaneously. The Mini
OIT holds up to 255 characters in its buffer and generally processes over 1000 characters
per second; therefore, a 1/8th second delay (0.125 second) should be adequate unless
you send a complex escape sequence, such as a screen display.
3-18
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
3
Parallel Port Description
The connector definitions for the parallel port connector are provided below.
ÎÎ
PIN 1
a42854
PIN 2
PIN
1 Shield
2 Ground
3 Ground
4 Recv Ready (Output)
5 Recv Clock (Input)
6 Recv Bit 0
7 Recv Bit 1
8 Recv Bit 2
9 Recv Bit 3
10 Recv Bit 4
11 Recv Bit 5
12 Recv Bit 6
13 Recv Bit 7
PIN
14 Txmit Ready (Input)
15 Txmit Clock (Output)
16 Txmit Bit 0
17 Txmit Bit 1
18 Txmit Bit 2
19 Txmit Bit 3
20 Txmit Bit 4
21 Txmit Bit 5
22 Txmit Bit 6
23 Txmit Bit 7
24 Vcc (+5 V dc)
25 Vcc (+5 V dc)
26 Vcc (+5 V dc)
Notes:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
All signals are TTL level, limited to one standard TTL load.
Recv Data Bits and Txmit Data Bits are active high signals.
Recv Clock is an active high input pulse that indicates that Data is valid. Data is loaded from the peripheral on a
low to high transition. Data must be present for 150 nS prior to this transition.
Recv Ready is an active high output signal that indicates new data may be transmitted to the Mini OIT.
Txmit Clock is an active high output pulse that indicates that Data is valid. New data is loaded onto the data
output lines on a low to high transition. It is reset to a low state upon the high going transition of the Txmit
Ready signal.
Txmit Ready is an active high input pulse that indicates on a low to high transition that the Mini OIT is ready to
transmit data to the peripheral.
An input low voltage signal must be between -0.3 and +0.8 V dc.
An input high voltage signal must be between 2.0 and 5.0 V dc.
An output low voltage signal will be a maximum of 0.4 V dc, and is capable of sinking a maximum of 2.0 mA.
An output high voltage signal will be a minimum of 2.4 V dc, and is capable of sourcing a maximum of 250
mA.
Figure 3-18. The Parallel Port Connector
Parallel Port Operation
The parallel communications port allows communication to hosts that do not support a
serial interface but instead support discrete digital inputs and outputs.
All data received from the parallel port is stored in the receive buffer of the Mini OIT
simultaneously with data received on the serial port. Likewise, all data transmitted by
the Mini OIT will simultaneously be sent through both the serial and parallel ports.
The parallel port therefore is capable of transmitting and receiving full ASCII data, and 8
data bits are available in both directions. All Mini OIT commands implemented can be
sent over the parallel port, and all data transmitted will be the equivalent ASCII data.
In actual operation, it is not required that all 8 data bits be controlled by the host. For
instance, only 7 bits are actually required for ASCII data, and depending upon the type
of data being used, fewer bits may be required.
GFK-0361
Chapter 3 Installation
3-19
3
For example, if the letters A-O only are used, the output on the parallel port would be
the hex codes 41 through 4F. As can be seen, only the lower 4 bits will change based
upon the key pressed, and the user could connect only these 4 signals to the host and
perform the decoding of that data fairly easily within even the simplest of PLCs or other
hosts.
Handshaking
The parallel port has two sets of handshaking lines that can be used to control the
transfer of data. These signals called BUSY and STROBE are used to indicate when data
is valid, and when the sending device is allowed to transmit subsequent data.
Because the data being placed on a parallel interface may not have all bits valid
simultaneously, the method of operation calls for a STROBE signal to be toggled after
the data is valid. This tells the receiving device that the data can be used.
The receiving device has the option of setting the BUSY signal active while it is
processing a newly received character so that new data does not overwrite data being
processed.
Using the Screen Display and Data Fill Command with the Parallel Port
For a host with full ASCII capabilities, sending complex escape sequences is generally no
more difficult than sending simple data. For less intelligent hosts, implementing an
interface using the parallel port to send complex sequences may prove difficult. One
feature that has been specifically developed to avoid this problem is the Screen Display
and Data Fill command.
The Screen Display and Data Fill command, described in Chapter 5, allows the user to
recall a pre-stored screen and imbed data at specific locations on the screen without the
need for cursor positioning commands and many other graphic commands. Using the
serial port, this command still requires a complete escape sequence. For the Mini OIT,
this command will automatically be performed by setting the 8th bit on the parallel port
and using the lower bits to indicate the file to display and fill.
In this manner, up to 128 files can be accessed using a single byte command.
3-20
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
3
Easy Display Mode
The Mini OIT can be used as an intelligent stored message display with a parallel
interface. The parallel controlled message display mode is enabled via the Configuration
screen. This mode allows a programmable controller, using only discrete outputs, to
initiate the display of informative and easy to read messages on the alpha-numeric
information, binary, or binary coded decimal (BCD) numbers may be input and
displayed in the messages. Messages and numbers may also be sent to a printer or any
other device that has a serial input port.
Table 3-1. Parallel Port Connections for Easy Display Mode
PIN
BIT
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
FUNCTION
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
DKS0
DKS1
NL0
NL1
NEG
ZS
PRNT
DV
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
Data Kind Select 0
Data Kind Select 1
Numeric Length 0
Numeric Length 1
Negative
Zero Suppress
Print
Data Valid
Data Inputs 0-7. The Mini OIT will interpret the inputs on lines D0-D7 as alpha-numeric
characters or MESSAGE, BCD, or BINARY numbers depending on the status of the Data
Kind Select signals. All data signal inputs will be discrete binary numbers.
Alpha-numeric, Binary, and BCD-Format data are displayed and used as file fill data.
Alpha-numeric data uses the same codes listed in Appendix B.
The MESSAGE number selects a MESSAGE (screen file) to be displayed. The MESSAGE
number is interpreted as a binary number. BCD data is in packed BCD format, and is
displayed as a decimal number. A single byte may have values from 00 to 99. Binary
data is displayed as received, and may have a single byte value from 0 to 255.
Data Kind Select 0 and 1. These lines determine which kind of data is being input.
Table 3-2. Data Kind Selections
DKS1
LOW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
DKS0
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
KIND OF DATA
Alpha-numeric(ASCII) character
MESSAGE (screen file) number (interpreted as binary)
BCD number (also hexadecimal)
BINARY number
Note
When BCD is selected, digit codes which are greater than 9 are
displayed as hexadecimal characters A to F.
GFK-0361
Chapter 3 Installation
3-21
3
Numeric Length 0 and 1. These lines determine how many bytes will be input to form a
number. Used only for BCD and BINARY numbers.
Table 3-3. Numeric Data Length Selections
NL1
NL0
NO. BYTES
LOW
LOW
HIGH
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
LOW
HIGH
1 Byte
2 Bytes
3 Bytes
4 Bytes
The most significant byte of a numeric value is input first, the least significant byte is
input last. The number is converted to an ASCII encoded numeric value when this least
significant byte is received. Note that the length of the converted numeric value is
determined by the number of bytes that are received. The state of NL1 and NL0 when
the first byte of a numeric value is received determines how many bytes are to follow. If
all numbers are to have the same number of bytes then NL1 and NL0 can simply be held
at the constant levels which well reflect the selected numeric length.
Negative. Indicates to the Mini OIT numeric formatter that a minus sign should be
displayed with the number. It is used only with BCD or BINARY data. This signal
should be presented along with any byte of the number. It is asserted when the signal is
HIGH.
Zero Suppress. When a HIGH signal is present on this line, it indicates to the Mini OIT
numeric formatter that leading zeros of the numeric value should be replaced with
spaces. This function may be used only with BCD or BINARY data. This signal should
be presented along with any byte of the number.
Print. This signal, when high, causes data received from the host device to be output via
the Mini OIT serial port instead of displayed on the screen. A hardcopy printer or any
other device with a serial interface may be connected.
Data Valid. Data is input while this signal is high. If the signal is low, no data will be
read even if the data changes. While the signal is high the data is polled for changes. If
the data changes and then is read without changing for a period of (filter time)
milliseconds, the data is then input and used. The DATA VALID signal can simply be
held high if the connected device is able to complete the update of all signals within
(filter time) milliseconds. By driving the DATA VALID signal low, performing the data
update, holding DATA VALID high for at least (filter time) milliseconds, and then
returning DATA VALID to LOW, the rate of update can be controlled by the connected
device. See the note on Noise Rejection De-Bounce Logic below for an explanation of
filter time.
The Mini OIT Numeric Formatter determines how the BCD and BINARY values are
displayed. All numeric values are converted to an ASCII encoded decimal number
before being displayed. The length of the ASCII encoded data field is determined by the
most significant byte input and the data kind (BCD or BINARY).
3-22
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
3
Table 3-4. Length of ASCII Encoded Data
DATA KIND
NO. BYTES INPUT
LENGTH OF EDITED NUMBER
BCD
BCD
BCD
BCD
BINARY
BINARY
1
2
3
4
1
2
2
4
6
8
3
6
The edited length is the number of data fill characters that should be included in a
message (screen file) for each number to be correctly inserted during the data fill
operation.
Zero suppression will replace leading zeros with spaces but will not change the length of
the edited number. The minus sign will be placed in front of the most significant digit.
The minus sign does not change the length of the edited number. The minus sign may
replace the most significant digit if the number is too large. One way to avoid this is to
input one more byte of the number than is required for the number of digits. This most
significant byte will be zero so that there will be room for the minus sign in the edited
field. If the first character of a negative number is a non-zero digit, an asterisk will
replace this digit to indicate that the number is negative and that the most significant
digit was overwritten.
The maximum BCD number is 99999999. The maximum binary number is 65535.
Note on Using BCD for Message Numbers: While message numbers are always
processed as binary values, it is possible to use BCD codes. The maximum BCD message
number is 99. Since the Easy Display interprets this as a binary value the corresponding
stored message is number 153.
Table 3-5. Calling Up Messages Using BCD
BCD MESSAGES NUMBERS
INTERNAL MESSAGE NUMBERS
00 to 09
10 to 19
20 to 29
30 to 39
40 to 49
50 to 59
60 to 69
70 to 79
80 to 89
90 to 99
0 to 9
16 to 25
32 to 41
48 to 57
64 to 73
80 to 89
96 to 105
112 to 121
128 to 137
144 to 153
Note on the Noise Rejection De-Bounce Logic: Parallel input data is polled 960 times
per second or about every 1.04 milliseconds. When Easy Display mode is selected on the
Configuration screen, a filter time is also displayed. This number represents the number
of poll times that the input data must be read without changing before the data is
accepted as valid information. This value can be set from 1 to 255 for noise filter times
from 1.04 milliseconds to 266 milliseconds.
GFK-0361
Chapter 3 Installation
3-23
3
Parallel Port in User Programmable I/O Mode
The Mini OIT can be programmed by the user to select the I/O status of all 16 parallel
signal lines. Each line can be either an input or output, and can be turned on or off at
the command of the operator or host device.
Note
The text below describes the basic operation of the User Programmable
I/O Mode. It is recommended, however, that you consult GE Fanuc
Automation to assist you in developing your specific application using
this mode.
I/O mode data, input data, and output data are all processed as a decimal number used
as a parameter in the escape sequence or OptiSCREEN command. The decimal number
may have a value from 0 to 65535 and is processed as a 16-bit binary value by the
terminal. Each bit of the binary value corresponds to a discrete signal on the parallel
port connector.
Table 3-6. Parallel Port Bit Values for User Programmable I/O Mode
PIN
BIT
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
DECIMAL VALUE
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
Note that the READY and CLOCK handshaking signals that are required for normal
parallel operations are not used during User Programmable I/O mode.
In Local mode, Escape sequences may be entered using a keyboard. In On-Line mode,
the Escape sequences are received at the parallel connector.
For both Input and Output operations, a data bit value of zero represents an ”Off ” state,
and the TTL level at the parallel connector will be ”low”. A bit value of one represents
the ”On” state, and the TTL level will be ”high”.
Initializing User Programmable I/O Mode
To initialize the User Programmable I/O Mode, use either the OptiSCREEN command,
PARALLEL I/O MODE: Pn or the equivalent Escape sequence explained below.
3-24
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
3
PARALLEL I/O MODE: nnn nnn is the numeric parameter which determines the
input/output mode of each discrete signal. If nnn is 0 (zero), all 16 signals will be used as
outputs. If nnn is 65535 (maximum value), all signals will be used as inputs. For
example, if nnn is 28 (4 + 8 + 16) bits 2, 3, and 4 will be inputs and all others will be
outputs.
Esc [>nnnp This escape sequence is equivalent to the OptiSCREEN PARALLELI/O
MODE command.
Esc [>p This escape sequence is the same as above except that all 16 signals are used as
inputs.
The PARALLEL I/O MODE command or equivalent escape sequence automatically turns
off any signals that were programmed as outputs.
Inputting Parallel Data
To input the status of the discrete signals use either the INPUT PARALLEL DATA
command or the equivalent escape sequence as explained below.
INPUT PARALLEL DATA This OptiSCREEN command reads the On/Off status of the
16 signals as a decimal number.
Esc [>i This escape sequence performs the same operation as the OptiSCREEN
command.
Esc [>nnni When this escape sequence is used is received, the value of nnn is displayed.
Outputting Parallel Data
To output parallel data, use the OUTPUT PARALLEL DATA: nnn command or the
equivalent escape sequence as explained below.
OUTPUT PARALLEL DATA: nnn This OptiSCREEN command outputs data based on
the decimal value (nnn) explained before. For example, if bits 0 through 7 have been set
up as outputs and all bits are 0 except bit 7, the decimal value of nnn is 128.
Esc [>nnno This escape sequence works the same as the OptiSCREEN command.
Esc [o This escape sequence turns off all outputs.
The parallel input sequence polls the input status of all 16 signals for a period of
debounce time to verify that the signals were not in the process of changing while being
read. The signals must be stable for at least the filter time shown on the Configuration
Menu.
It is recommended that each output command be followed by an input command to
check that the output command was actually received and processed. Since the input
command reads the status of all 16 signals, the status of those bits that were
programmed for output will represent the value of the last output command processed.
Connecting the Parallel Port to PLC Output Modules
As stated before, the Mini OIT parallel port can be connected directly to a 5-volt TTL
output module. The Series Six PLC and Series Five PLC offer this type of module. To
connect a Series One PLC to the Mini OIT parallel port, you must use the 24-volt source
output module (IC610MDL158) with a 5-volt power supply and pull down resistors as
shown in the figure below.
GFK-0361
Chapter 3 Installation
3-25
3
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
MIMI OIT
IC610MDL158
MODULE
USER
WIRING
PIN
a42855
USER
WIRING
PIN
24
CA
6
5V
0
*
1
8
7
*
2
*
3
10
9
*
4
*
5
12
11
*
6
*
7
25
13
*
CB
5V
0
17
16
*
1
*
2
18
*
3
19
*
4
20
*
5
21
*
22
6
*
7
23
*
2
0V
*
100-250
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
MIMI OIT
0V
3
Figure 3-19. Parallel Port Wiring to a Series One PLC
Installing Memory
The Mini OIT is shipped with nominally 30 Kbytes of battery backed CMOS RAM
memory as standard. As an option, an additional 32 Kbytes of battery backed CMOS
RAM may be installed as backup screen memory.
The memory banks are described as 00 and 01 and contain 32 K-bytes each. Both banks
are RAM memory only. The table below shows the banks with associated sockets and
jumper positions.
Table 3-7. Mini OIT Memory Bank Socket and Jumper Positions
BANK
SOCKET
JUMPER
00
01
U28
U25
No Jumper
W18-W19
If RAM is installed and the jumper is not in the W18-19 position (see Figure 3-20), the
RAM will function, but the data will not be battery protected (data will be lost if the Mini
OIT is powered off).
The following RAM chip part numbers are recommended for replacing or for adding
memory.
D
D
D
3-26
NEC D43256C-12L
Mitsubishi M5M5256P-12L
Sony CXK58256P-12L
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
3
The figure below shows the memory expansion socket and jumper locations for the Mini
OIT.
a42856
W17
W18
W19
W20
W21
W22
W23
W24
W25
Figure 3-20. Memory Socket and Jumper Locations for the Mini OIT
To add the memory chip for bank 01 follow the procedure below:
1.
Unplug the Mini OIT from the main power source.
Warning
High voltages are present in the terminal while power is connected,
even if the unit is turned off.
2.
GFK-0361
Place the Mini OIT face down on a non abrasive surface. Position the unit so the
bottom panel of the chassis is toward you.
Chapter 3 Installation
3-27
3
3.
Remove the 10 screws holding the bottom panel of the chassis. The bottom chassis
is still connected to the top chassis by two ribbon cables.
4.
Unplug the ribbon cables, noting proper location and orientation for later
reinstallation.
5.
Disconnect the battery before adding or removing memory.
Caution
Adding or removing memory chips while the battery is still connected
can damage the chip.
6.
Insert the memory chip into socket U25 so that the notch (or dot) at one end of the
chip corresponds to the notch at one end of the memory socket.
Caution
The electronic circuitry and memory chips being installed are subject
to damage by static electricity. Always ground yourself before you
touch the logic board. Keep uninstalled memory chips in their original
package until ready for use. Damage to the logic board or the memory
chips due to improper handling or installation is not covered by the
warranty.
3-28
7.
Verify that the Memory Power Supply Jumper for socket U25 is in the W18-19
position.
8.
Before replacing the bottom of the chassis, verify that all pins of the memory chip
are properly inserted into the socket and that the chip is installed with the proper
orientation.
9.
Reconnect the ribbon cables to the circuit board, and remount the bottom panel of
the chassis.
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
3
CRT Adjustment
The Mini OIT is a compact, rugged interactive terminal. The 5’’ x 9’’ CRT is capable of
displaying 16 lines of 80 characters each. The figure below shows the front and right
side view of the Mini OIT. The right side contains the CRT controls.
Warning
All CRT controls are set at the factory and should need no adjustment.
Hazardous voltages are present in the vicinity of the controls. If
adjustments do become necessary, they are to be done only by
qualified personnel. CRT brightness is controlled by a knob on the
rear of the Mini OIT.
a42842
GE Fanuc
Mini OIT
Î
Î
Î
Î
HORIZONTAL CENTER
BRIGHTNESS
VERTICAL LINEARITY
WIDTH
HEIGHT
FOCUS
VERTICAL HOLD
Figure 3-21. CRT Controls for the Mini OIT
GFK-0361
Chapter 3 Installation
3-29
Chapter
4 Operation
4
section level 1 1
figure bi level 1
table_big level 1
This chapter describes the system operations of the Mini OIT. Topics covered in this
chapter are:
D
D
D
D
Modes of Operation
The Configuration Menu
The OptiSCREEN Editor Menu
Keyboard Operations
Modes of Operation
As stated in Chapter 2, ”Getting Started”, there are three modes of operation in which
the Mini OIT can power up. Each mode will be discussed here in detail.
On-Line mode: Normal operating mode after installation and program development
are complete.
Edit mode: Mode for accessing the OptiSCREEN editor to create screens using English
language statements.
Local mode: Mode for creating screens using escape sequences or for testing operation
of escape sequences.
The power-up mode is selected in the Configuration menu. If the Edit mode or Local
mode has been selected, the Configuration menu will appear after power up and will be
displayed for about 30 seconds before the selected mode is entered. If you change an
option on the Configuration menu or simply move the cursor, the screen will remain
displayed about 4 minutes before entering the selected mode. Any subsequent
operation on the Configuration menu will reset the timer.
If the On-line mode was previously selected, the Mini OIT will enter the On-line mode
directly after power up, and the Configuration menu will not appear.
If the Mini OIT is already powered up and the selected mode of operation has been
entered (On-line, Edit, Local) you can access the Configuration menu by pressing the
Control key and the number 1 [Ctrl]-1 on the keyboard simultaneously.
On-Line Mode
The On-Line mode is the normal operating mode after the Mini OIT is installed and
ready for normal everyday operations. This is also the mode used for programming a
GFK-0361
4-1
4
remote device such as the ASCII/BASIC module. The On-Line mode is especially useful
for simulating and testing the communication sequences and protocol used with a
remote device.
When the Mini OIT is on-line, any one of 128 ASCII characters can be sent through the
serial port to a computer or other intelligent machine. In the On-Line mode, the
terminal can be configured for either Echo (half-duplex) or No-Echo (full-duplex)
operations. In Echo mode, the character sent will also be displayed on the screen. In the
No-Echo mode, the host computer or programmable controller must return the
character before it is displayed. However, some of these characters will not be displayed
if the computer sends them back to the Mini OIT. ASCII characters 0-31 are
non-displayable characters. Most applications will use No-Echo operations.
Edit Mode
The Edit mode is used to access the OptiSCREEN Editor. The OptiSCREEN Editor is
used to create screen formats to make the display of data easy to read. The screen
formats are programmed using English language commands instead of the Escape
sequences required for Local Mode operation. These commands enable you to control
where data is placed on the screen and what the appearance of the data will be. There
are also commands which allow you to call other programmed screen files.
The screen format usually consists of the screen title, explanations of the dynamic data
sent by the host, and any graphics such as lines and boxes used to clearly present the
data.
Local Mode
Local mode can be used to practice creating the various escape sequences which are to
be sent by the host to the Mini OIT in On-Line operation. Local mode can also be used
for screen creation (although the OptiSCREEN Editor is normally used to create screens).
When the unit is in Local mode, no characters are transmitted, but are displayed directly
on the screen. Cursor controls and escape sequences are processed immediately by the
unit.
Note
Escape sequences are a combination of the ASCII code 1B (hex)/27(dec),
which is the code for the Escape key (Esc), followed by one or more
additional characters. Escape sequences are normally sent by the host to
the Mini OIT and Escape sequences are used to change screen attributes,
move the cursor, store and recall screens, plus many other operations.
The ASCII Characters and Escape Sequences listed in the appendices show the
commands and special escape sequences that the Mini OIT supports. Your
computer-based system must contain the proper software for it to respond to and send
the codes that use these special functions. Different versions of software may support
different features.
The Configuration Menu
The Mini OIT has several data communication formats and many useful operating
features. Data communication format options include baud rate selection, type of parity,
4-2
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
4
word length, and number of stop bits. Operating features and options include Echo
(half-duplex) or No-Echo (full duplex) operation, escape sequence mode (ANSI, VT-100,
or VT-52), cursor type, and others. Many features can be invoked through escape
sequences; all can be invoked through the menu-driven Configuration menu.
Accessing the Configuration Menu
The Mini OIT can be configured to power up into the On-Line, Edit, or Local mode. The
power-up mode is selected in the Configuration menu. If the Local mode or Edit mode
has been selected, the Configuration screen will appear after power up and will be
displayed for about 30 seconds before the selected mode is entered. If you change an
option on the Configuration menu or simply move the cursor, the screen will remain
displayed about 4 minutes before entering the selected mode. Any subsequent
operation on the Configuration menu will reset the timer.
If the On-line mode was previously selected, the Mini OIT will enter the On-line mode
directly after power up, and the Configuration menu will not appear.
Note
If the Mini OIT is already powered up and the selected mode of
operation has been entered (On-line, Local, Edit) you can access the
Configuration menu by pressing the Control key and the number 1
[Ctrl]-1 on the keyboard simultaneously.
Whenever the Configuration menu is entered (through [Ctrl]-1, or Power-Up, or System
Reset), the following operations occur:
D
Any IBM PC-XT compatible keyboard that is connected at that time will be
re-initialized. (Remember, this turns off CAPS LOCK and NUMERIC LOCK.)
D
Any file storage operation will be aborted. Any previous version of a file that was
saved will be retained.
D
D
D
All screen attributes will be reset.
All screen data will be lost, and input/output buffers cleared.
Line attributes will be retained.
Touch Configuration
When DIP switch #3 (see Chapte 3 for discussion of DIP switches) is in the “OFF”
position, the lower four lines of the Configuration menu have graphics for seven touch
boxes that may be used as function keys F1-F7. The touch boxes may be used to move
the configuration indicator to a configuration option or to select, perform or exit from
the menu. In this mode the terminal may be configured without the use of an XT
keyboard, though the keyboard will still be required to use the built-in OptiSCREEN
editor. With DIP switch #3 is in the “ON” position the touch screen CANNOT be used
to configure the terminal; an XT keyboard MUST be used.
GFK-0361
Chapter 4 Operation
4-3
4
Sample Configuration
A sample Mini OIT configuration is displayed below. The box at the top of the screen
describes the revision and release levels and the release date for the firmware contained
in the unit. At the left side of the screen is a list of the various modes and functions that
may be selected. These correspond to the status messages shown on the same row at
the right side of the screen. The box at the bottom of the menu describes the operations
which can be performed while in the Configuration mode, and the keys that may be
used to perform them.
Ge Fanuc Operator Interface Terminal
Rel 2.5-32
060ct93
________________________________________________________________________________
OPERATION
LOCAL
ANSI NO ECHO SEND ANY CASE
END LINE/COLOR
NO WRAP NO AUTO LF
CURSOR/SCREEN
BLINKING BLOCK
CRT SAVER OFF
KEY CODES
THREE
SERIAL PORT
9600
EVEN 7 BIT 1 STOP HARD PT TO PT
PARALLEL PORT MODE
PARALLEL IS AUXILIARY, SERIAL IS PRIMARY
CONFIGURATION
SAVE
TESTS
DIAGNOSTIC
MEMORY
SAVE
SCREENS 00 TO SCREENS 00
________________________________________________________________________________
-UPF1
-DOWNF2
-LEFTF3
-RIGHTF4
-SELECTF5
-PERFORMF6
-EXITF7
Figure 4-1. The Configuration Menu
Note
The terminal must be configured to match the data communication
format of the host or peripheral equipment. Consult your equipment
manual for details on the required format.
Modifying the Configuration
The current configuration is displayed in the Configuration menu. To change the
configuration of one of the features or functions, do the following:
1.
Move the cursor to the status message which is to be changed by using appropriate
function keys [F1-F4].
2.
When the cursor is at the desired status message for a particular feature or function,
press the [F5] SELECT Key to scroll through the options available.
3.
When the desired option is displayed, set the terminal to the new status by simply
moving the cursor to another status message.
4.
After you have selected the desired option for all the features and functions, you can
temporarily save the configuration by pressing the [F7] EXIT key to take the
terminal out of Configuration mode. In this case the configuration will be
maintained only as long as the Mini OIT is powered up. If you want to save the
displayed options as the power-up configuration, see the section, Saving and
Recalling the Configuration, below.
An exception to the above procedure is the method used to set the Multi (multidrop
address) function:
1.
4-4
As before, move the cursor to the status message.
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
4
2.
Press the [F5] SELECT key to change from Point-to-Point to Multi. When Multi is
first displayed a dim cursor block appears to the right of the word Multi. In the
cursor block is a number (00-15) which indicates the number of drops to be
configured.
If the previous configuration was Multi, press the [F5] SELECT key once to select
Point-to-Point or twice if you wish to return to Multi to change the number of drops.
3.
Press the [F5] SELECT key to scroll to the desired number of drops or enter the
number directly from the keyboard.
4.
When the desired number of drops is displayed, press the [F6] PERFORM key to
retain the number of drops entered. You can then move to the next field to be
configured.
Saving and Recalling the Configuration
Once the configuration is set up, the configuration can be saved for future
power-off/power- on cycles. When this is done, the saved configuration will be entered
automatically by the terminal on power-up, regardless of the configuration it had when
power was shut down.
To save a configuration set-up, follow this procedure:
1.
Move the cursor to the configuration SAVE/RECALL status message.
2.
Press the [F5] SELECT key to display the SAVE message.
3.
Press the [F6] PERFORM key to save the displayed configuration.
Note
Any previously saved configuration will be lost when the Save
command is executed.
If you have made changes to the configuration, but you want to recall the last
configuration that was saved, follow this procedure:
1.
Move the cursor to the configuration SAVE/RECALL status message.
2.
Press the [F5] SELECT key to display the RECALL message.
3.
When the RECALL message is displayed, press the [F6] PERFORM key to reset the
terminal to the last configuration that was saved.
Exiting the Configuration Menu
To exit the Configuration Menu, press the [F7] EXIT key. The terminal will automatically
exit the Configuration menu if the terminal is allowed to remain idle for a period of
about 4 minutes. In either case, the terminal will automatically go into the operating
mode displayed on the screen.
When the terminal exits the Configuration menu, the screen will be cleared and the
cursor (if selected) will be in the upper left corner of the screen (HOME). Any data on
the screen prior to entering the Configuration menu will NOT be saved.
Configuration Options
This section contains first a brief summary and then a detailed description of the options
available from the Configuration menu.
GFK-0361
Chapter 4 Operation
4-5
4
The table below lists all the Mini OIT functions and the options for each.
Table 4-1. Summary of Configuration Menu Options
FUNCTION
Mode of Operation
Escape Sequence
Echo/NoEcho
Case of Char. Transmitted
End of Line Characteristics
Cursor Type
Keyboard Codes (Types)
Serial PortConfiguration
Baud Rates
Parity
Number of Stop Bits
Type of Handshaking
CommunicationType
Serial/Parallel PortConfigurations
Configuration Screen
Confidence Tests
Extended Memory
Screen Saver
4-6
OPTIONS
Local, On-Line, Edit
ANSI, VT-100, VT-52
Echo, No Echo
Send Any Case, Send Caps. Only
Wrap, No Wrap
Auto Line Feed, No Auto Line Feed
Blinking Block, Blinking Underline
Steady Block, Steady Underline
No Cursor
One, Two, Three, Four, Five
50, 110, 134.5, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1050, 1200, 1800, 2000, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19.2 K, 38.4 K
Even, Mark, Space, Odd, None
7 bit, 8 bit
Hard, Soft
Point to Point, Multidrop
Serial is Primary, Parallel is Auxiliary
Parallel is Primary, Serial is Auxiliary
Serial and Parallel are Primary
Easy Display Filter time: 5
User Programmable Filter time: 5
Save, Recall
Diagnostic,Communications,
Display Test Pattern, Extended Memory
ManufacturingCycle
Save Screens 00 to Internal 01
Recall Internal 01 to Screens 00
Swap
Compare
OFF, ON
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
4
The default configuration as shipped from the factory, or in the event of the loss of
battery back-up, is as follows:
Table 4-2. Default Configuration for the Mini OIT
Local mode
Keyboard Code THREE
ANSI escape sequences
9600 Baud
Echo Off
Even Parity
Send Any Case
7-Bit Word
Wrap at End of Line Off
1-Stop Bit
Auto Line-feed Off
HardwareHandshaking
Blinking Block cursor
Point-To-Pointcommunications
Mode of Operation
On-Line Mode. The On-Line mode is the normal operating mode after the Mini OIT is
installed and ready for normal everyday operations. This is also the mode used for programming a remote device such as the ASCII/BASIC module. The On-Line mode is especially useful for simulating and testing the communication sequences and protocol used with a remote
device.
When the unit is on-line, the keyboard, depending upon its layout, can transmit any one
of 128 ASCII characteristics serial port to a computer or other intelligent machine. In the
On-Line mode, the terminal can be configured for either Echo (half-duplex) or No-Echo
(full-duplex) operations. In Echo mode, the character sent will also be displayed on the
screen. In the No-Echo mode, the host computer or programmable controller must
return the character before it is displayed. However, some of these characters will not be
displayed if the computer sends them back to the OIT. ASCII characters 0-31 are
non-displayable characters. Most applications will use No-Echo operations.
Edit Mode. The Edit mode is used to access the OptiSCREEN Editor. The OptiSCREEN
Editor is used to create screen formats to make the display of data easy to read. The
screen format usually consists of the screen title, explanations of the dynamic data sent
from the host, and any graphics such as lines and boxes used to clearly present the data.
Local Mode. Local mode can be used for learning the use of various escape sequences
and for screen creation (although the OptiSCREEN Editor is normally used to create
screens). When the unit is in the Local mode, no characters are transmitted, but are displayed directly on the screen. Cursor controls and escape sequences are processed immediately by the unit.
The ”ASCII Characters” and ”Escape Sequences” listed in the appendices show the
commands and special escape sequences that the Mini OIT supports. Your
computer-based system must contain the proper software for it to respond to and send
the codes that use these special functions. Different versions of software may support
different features.
Escape Sequence Type
The Mini OIT is an intelligent terminal. In addition to simply transmitting and receiving
data, it can respond to a wide variety of commands, referred to as escape sequences
throughout this manual.
GFK-0361
Chapter 4 Operation
4-7
4
Note
Escape sequences are a combination of the ASCII code 1B (hex)/27(dec),
which is the code for the Escape key (Esc), followed by one or more
additional characters. Escape sequences are normally sent by the host to
the Mini OIT and are used to change screen attributes, move the cursor,
store and recall screens, plus many other operations.
The Mini OIT supports numerous commands in the ANSI format, as well as commands
previously defined by Digital Equipment Corporation for the VT-52 and VT-100 display
terminals. Any of these modes may be used (ANSI, VT-52, or VT-100). Many of the
non-standard, private commands used by the DEC VT-100 are also supported by the
ANSI mode.
Few terminals use all of the commands defined by ANSI X3.64; many define private
commands that expand on the ANSI set. To be ANSI compatible, a device must be able
to recognize properly formatted ANSI commands and ignore those standardized
commands that are not used. Any private commands (although ANSI compatible)
generated by your software must either be supported or safely ignored by the terminal
actually being used.
Echo or No-Echo Mode
Allows half-duplex (Echo) or full-duplex (No-Echo) operation. In No-Echo mode, all
keys entered are transmitted to the host device and no action is taken by the terminal
until the host returns the same key codes. In Echo mode, the keys entered are
transmitted to the host and simultaneously action is taken by the terminal as if the key
codes had been returned by the host.
Note
A remote device can disable the Echo mode of the terminal by sending
the Disable Half-Duplex command (Esc [ > 14 l) to the Mini OIT when
the Mini OIT is On-Line.
Send Any Case/Send Upper Case Only
If Send Upper Case Only is selected, lower-case characters are automatically transmitted
as upper-case characters.
End of Line Controls
The options are: Wrap or No Wrap, Auto Line-Feed or No Auto LF. The Wrap feature
causes an automatic carriage return and line feed when a character is displayed in the
80th column. The Auto Line-Feed feature enables the terminal to automatically perform
a line-feed when a carriage return is processed. This function should be disabled if
double line-feeds appear on the screen since this means that the host is already sending
a line feed with each carriage return. The terminal must be in the same configuration
when a screen file is being created as it will be when the screen is being used.
Cursor Type
Allows the user to select Blinking Block, Blinking Underline, Steady Block, or Steady
Underline cursor. It has no effect on the transfer or processing of data.
4-8
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
4
Screen Saver
A new option has ben added to the Configuration menu to allow for the enabling of a
CRT screen saver function. When enabled the CRT will be turned off after five minutes
(Ç ten seconds) of not sensing any screen or keyboard activity. When the OIT either
senses a keypress or receives display information it will automatically turn the CRT back
on. When the CRT is turned off, the initial keystroke will turn the CRT back on, but the
keypress will NOT be acted upon. By default the screen saver option is disabled.
Sealed Keyboard Encoding
This feature describes the type of sealed keyboard that will be attached during normal
operation.
Type 1 Keyboard. This option is selected when using the 65-position model with the
”Terminal” keyboard insert. The layout is for the non typist.
Type 2 Keyboard. This option is selected when using the 65-position model with the
”BASIC Programmer ” keyboard insert.
Type 3 Keyboard. Not used.
Type 4 Keyboard. This option is selected when using the 65-position keyboard with the
QWERTY-style key layout.
Type 5 Keyboard. This option is a user-programmable keyboard layout that allows you
to define the ASCII codes for the keyboard. It is selected when using the programmable
Touch Screen keypad for operator input. It is also selected if you wish to customize any
of the other sealed keyboard layouts.
Serial Port Configuration
Baud Rate Selection. Allows the following baud rate selections: 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19,200, and 38,400.
Parity Selection. You can select Even, Odd, or None parity. Even, Odd, or None parity
can be used with either 7 or 8-bit word lengths. .
Word Length. The word length may be either 7 or 8 bits long.
Number of Stop Bits. You can select 1 or 2 stop bits. If the host or peripheral equipment
runs at a baud rate of 110 or lower, 2 stop bits should generally be selected. For higher
baud rates, select 1 stop bit. Consult the manuals for the remote host or peripheral
equipment for specific requirements.
Type of Handshaking. Allows selection of either software or hardware handshaking. If
your equipment does not support either hardware or software handshaking, the terminal should be configured for hardware handshaking. When this configuration is used,
you must avoid overflowing the input buffer. Refer to the section on serial port operation in Chapter 3, ”Installation”, for a description of the handshaking operation.
Communication Type (Point-to-Point or Multidrop). Selects on-line communication
mode for the primary port. Point-to-point connection allows either software or hardware handshaking to be used, and will accept RS-232 or RS-422 signals. The multidrop
configuration allows a host to communicate with up to 16 terminal addresses, all on the
same RS-422 multidrop line. Multidrop mode automatically selects Echo operation.
When multidrop mode is selected and software handshaking is not supported by the
GFK-0361
Chapter 4 Operation
4-9
4
host, hardware handshaking should be selected but may not be used (Jumper Pin 5 to
Pin 20 on the Mini OIT primary port).
Serial/P arallel Port Configurations
There are 5 different port configurations for On-Line operation.
Serial Port is Primary, Parallel Port is Auxiliary. This is the most common mode of operation for the Mini OIT. This mode is used when connecting the Mini OIT to the ASCII/
BASIC module of a Series Six, Series Five, or Series One PLC.
This mode permits operator input (two way communications). The serial port is
connected to the host using RS-232 or RS-422 connections. The host transmits characters
or escape commands to the Mini OIT. When a sealed membrane keyboard or a full
travel keyboard is plugged into the Mini OIT, characters can be transmitted back to the
host device. Also, characters can be transmitted from the parallel port, but all characters
transmitted to the parallel port will be ignored. A parallel printer can be connected in
this configuration.
Parallel Port is Primary, Serial Port is Auxiliary. In this configuration, the Mini OIT is
connected through its parallel port to a host with a parallel port. Characters can be
transmitted from the serial port, but all characters transmitted to the serial port will be
ignored.
Parallel and Serial Port are Primary. In this configuration both the serial port and the
parallel ports can receive characters. Any characters entered on a touch screen, membrane keyboard, or full-travel keyboard are simultaneously transmitted out both the serial and parallel ports.
Easy Display. This configuration is specifically designed so that the Mini OIT can be
used as an intelligent stored message display with a parallel interface. The parallel port
is connected to the host through a parallel cable. This configuration allows a PLC, using
only the discrete outputs of a 5 V TTL Output module, to initiate the display of screen
files on the screen. In addition to displaying stored screen files, alpha-numeric information, binary, or binary coded decimal (BCD) numbers may also be sent to a printer or any
other device that has a parallel input port.
When Easy Display mode is selected on the Configuration screen, a filter time is also
displayed. This number represents the number of poll times that the input data must be
read without changing before the data is accepted as valid information. This value can
be set from 1 to 255 for noise filter times from 1.04 milliseconds to 266 milliseconds.
User Programmable. In this configuration the Mini OIT can be programmed by the user
to select the I/O status of all 16 parallel signal lines. Each line can be either turned on or
off at the command of the operator or host device. Contact GE Fanuc Automation for
further information.
Note
For information on using the parallel port in Easy Display mode, refer to
Chapter 3, ”Installation”.
Save/R ecall Configuration Screen Parameters
Allows the current displayed configuration to be saved, or the previously saved
configuration to be recalled.
4-10
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
4
Confidence Tests
The Configuration menu allows you to select a number of tests which will confirm the
correct operation of the unit. The menu supports a Diagnostic test, a Communication
test, an Extended Memory test, a Manufacturing Cycle test, and Test Pattern displays
which allow adjustments to the CRT.
Diagnostic Test. The Diagnostic test causes power-up diagnostics to be performed continuously until failure occurs or until the operator presses any key.
Communication Test. The Communication test checks both the serial and the parallel
ports. Before executing this test, a loop-back connector constructed as shown in the figures below must be constructed and installed. This test can be performed at any baud
rate, and with either RS-232, RS-422, or parallel signals. In the event of a failure, a failure
code is displayed. The terminal should be reset prior to restarting the test.
PIN
RS-232 DATA OUT
RS-232 DATA IN
RTS
CTS
RS-422 DATA IN +
RS-422 DATA OUT +
RS-422 DATA IN RS-422 DATA OUT -
a42845
2
3
4
5
10
11
22
23
Figure 4-2. Serial Port Loop-Back Diagram
PIN
RECV CLOCK (IN)
RECV READY (OUT)
RECV BIT 0
RECV BIT 1
RECV BIT 2
RECV BIT 3
RECV BIT 4
RECV BIT 5
RECV BIT 6
RECV BIT 7
TXMIT BIT 7
TXMIT BIT 6
TXMIT BIT 5
TXMIT BIT 4
TXMIT BIT 3
TXMIT BIT 2
TXMIT BIT 1
TXMIT BIT 0
TXMIT CLOCK (OUT)
TXMIT READY (IN)
a42880
5
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
Figure 4-3. Parallel Port Loop-Back Diagram
GFK-0361
Chapter 4 Operation
4-11
4
The following table lists the error messages that may be displayed if the Mini OIT fails
the Communication test:
Table 4-3. Communication Test Error Messages
ERROR
11
12
13
14
15
16
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
PORT (conn.)
Serial (J1)
Serial (J1)
Serial (J1)
Serial (J1)
Serial (J1)
Serial (J1)
Parallel (J6)
Parallel (J6)
Parallel (J6)
Parallel (J6)
Parallel (J6)
Parallel (J6)
Parallel (J6)
Parallel (J6)
FAILURE
No data received
Wrong data received
No data received
Wrong data received
CTS did not turn off
CTS did not turn on
No data received
Wrong data received
No data received
Wrong data received
No data received
Wrong data received
No data received
Wrong data received
TEST DATA
55H
55H
6AH
6AH
FFH
FFH
00H
00H
55H
55H
AAH
AAH
Extended Memory Test. The Extended Memory test checks user memory. Caution
should be observed when running this test, since a terminal reset or power interruption
during the test could modify the stored user memory.
Manufacturing Cycle Test. The Manufacturing Cycle test causes the terminal to run the
Diagnostics test, the Communications test, and the Extended Memory test one after the
other.
Display Test Pattern Test. This test displays a changing test pattern which allows you to
adjust the CRT to optimum performance.
Extended Memory Operations
The options are Save, Recall, Swap, and Compare. From the Configuration screen, you
can save, recall, swap, or compare the contents of one bank from or to the other memory
bank.
Note
Because the Save, Swap, Compare, and Recall functions can be
performed between memory banks, care must be taken to ensure that
screens are not inadvertently lost by performing a Save operation from
one bank into the other bank. It is possible to overwrite unique
information.
The firmware does not allow memory banks that are not installed to be selected on the
Configuration menu. Only those internal banks that exist will be displayed as the Select
key is used to cycle the options.
When executing a Back-Up memory operation from the Configuration menu, pressing
the Perform key causes a status message to appear next to the
Save/Recall/Swap/Compare message area which says ”WAIT...” and then
4-12
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
4
”COMPLETED”. No action should be taken until the message, ”COMPLETED”,
appears.
Note
Refer also to Chapter 3, ”Installation”, for information on extended
memory installation.
Bank 00 is the default screen storage bank. The default bank will remain selected until
the next select default escape sequence is processed or until the Mini OIT is reset or
powered off. Bank 00 will always be the initial screen bank after the unit is powered up.
All screen file commands (Create, Append, and Display) process a screen file from the
currently selected bank unless a different bank is specified in the command. The bank
specified in the command becomes the temporary screen bank. The previous or default
screen bank is restored at the end of the command processing.
Screen files which contain commands which display other screen files may specify files
in other screen banks. These files may in turn display other files in the same or other
banks. This is called File Nesting.
The Set Default Screen File Bank Command must not be used in any screen file. It is a
command which is processed when received at the primary port in on-line mode.
On the Mini OIT the memory banks are referred to as ”SCREENS 00” and ”INTERNAL
01”. This allows you to use one bank as the primary bank and one bank as the backup
bank.
Valid Screen Files Verification
Whenever the Mini OIT is powered up, the diagnostic test routine is performed (data in
Screen Bank 00 is checked to verify that the list of screen files can be correctly scanned).
If the screen file list is improperly formatted or has never been initialized, Screen Bank
00 will automatically be initialized.
Screen Bank 01 can be tested by selecting it as the default screen bank. The test is also
made before a directory is displayed. The message, ”USE CONTROL-C TO INITIALIZE
SCREENS”, will be displayed if the test fails. Pressing [Ctrl]-C will initialize that bank;
pressing any other key will terminate the operation being performed. The default
screen bank will be reset to Bank 00.
Note
It is especially important that screen memory be initialized before screen
creation, display, or directory commands are invoked. Use of these
commands prior to initializing screen memory may prevent proper
operation of many other commands.
The test is not performed when a screen file is displayed, appended, stored, or
transmitted. If a bank is selected as the temporary screen bank by including the bank
number in the command, and that bank is not in screen file bank format, results are
undefined. One possible error message is MEMORY FULL.
GFK-0361
Chapter 4 Operation
4-13
4
The OptiSCREEN Editor
The OptiSCREEN Editor is a built-in screen development and editing system available
on the Mini OIT. It is accessed by selecting the Edit mode from the Configuration menu.
Note
The OptiSCREEN Editor is compatible with the ANSI and VT-100
operating modes only. VT-52 mode is not supported. The OptiSCREEN
Editor was designed for use with a full-travel IBM PC-XT compatible
QWERTY-style keyboard. It is possible to use the editor with the sealed
keyboards, but some functions will not be available.
The menu-driven OptiSCREEN Editor eliminates the need to memorize, or even be
familiar with, escape sequences used to create screen files as you do when using Local
mode. While in the Edit mode, escape sequences and other non-text information are
replaced by simple, English-language OptiSCREEN statements. The same internal
storage format for screen files as used in earlier firmware releases has been maintained,
therefore, previously created files may be used and edited.
Other OptiSCREEN Editor features are listed below:
D
An OptiSCREEN program consists of a series of statement lines. Statements are
either command statements, display (text) statements, or comments.
D
D
Screen files can be displayed immediately, exactly as they will be executed.
D
Files can be deleted completely and removed from the directory.
File numbers and names can be altered. A copy of a file can be created as a different
file number.
OptiSCREEN Editor Menu
The OptiSCREEN Editor menu is entered by selecting Edit from the Configuration menu
and pressing the [F7] PERFORM key. If Edit has been selected and saved as the
power-up configuration, then upon power up the Configuration menu will first appear
and after a few seconds the Edit menu will appear automatically.
The OptiSCREEN Editor menu is shown below:
4-14
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
4
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
OptiSCREEN Editor SCREEN BANK 0
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ
a42846
UTIL
F1
EXIT
F2
EDIT
F5
SHOW
F6
STEP
F7
VIEW
F10
1 - Select edit file
2 - Print syntax list
3 - Print current edit file
4 - Print file
5 - Print directory
6 - Receive file
7 - Delete file(s)
8 - Select screen bank
9 - Select printer/receive device
Figure 4-4. The OptiSCREEN Editor Menu
OptiSCREENEditor Menu Operations
The following operations can be executed from the OptiSCREEN Editor menu:
Select Edit File. Allows you to select a screen file to be edited. When you enter the
number of the file, the OptiSCREEN program file listing is displayed on the screen with
the workstation in Edit mode.
Print Syntax List. Prints a list of the OptiSCREEN command statements that are used to
execute a screen file, along with the internal escape sequences they correspond to. For
all of the OptiSCREEN Editor menu Print functions, if a listing of a file is desired for reference, the terminal should be configured to send the output to a hardcopy printer (using the Select Printer/Receive Device function of the Editor). A display of what is being
printed will briefly be shown on the screen, but will rapidly scroll through the file and
then return immediately to the OptiSCREEN Editor menu. If you are viewing the Syntax List on the screen you can press [Ctrl]-s to stop and start the display.
Print Current Edit File. Prints a listing of the current status of the file being edited.
Print File. Allows a screen file to be selected for printing. The screen will display a
prompt asking for the file number, and will print the file when the number is entered.
Print Directory. The Directory of Screen Files may be displayed or printed with a single
keystroke.
Receive File. Configures the terminal to receive a file being sent to it through one of the
communication ports. A prompt is displayed asking for the number of the file to be received; and then a choice of which port it is to be received on. (The Display option listed
will have no effect.)
Delete File(s). Files may be deleted completely and removed from the directory. A
prompt will be displayed asking for the file number to be deleted.
Select Screen Bank. Allows you to select another screen bank if it exists.
Select Printer/Receive Device. Allows you to select the port through which data will be
sent or received. Options are Display Only or Serial Port.
OptiSCREENEditor Special Function Keys
Across the top of the OptiSCREEN Editor menu are six function keys. The purpose of
each key is explained below.
GFK-0361
Chapter 4 Operation
4-15
4
Note
Menu selections do not affect the current file being edited except for the
Select Edit File and Receive File functions. If you select one of these
functions, you have the option of saving the changes made to the
current file before the new menu operation is begun. If one of the other
menu functions is selected, after it is completed you can return to the
original file at the same line from which you left by pressing the Edit
key.
[F1]UTIL Key. The [F1]UTIL key will call the OptiSCREEN Editor menu to the screen.
Even during a file editing session, the [F1] key may be used to access the functions in the
OptiSCREEN Editor Menu.
[F2] EXIT Key. The [F2] EXIT key enables the terminal to leave the OptiSCREEN Edit
mode, and provides the option of saving the changes and renumbering the file that was
being edited. If the changes are saved but the file is not renumbered, the old version of
the file will be replaced by the new version. A renumbered file will be saved under the
new number, and the old file will remain in its original state. After a save or renumber
operation is completed, the display returns to the main Configuration menu.
[F5] EDIT Key. From the OptiSCREEN Editor menu, the Edit key can be used to initiate
an editing session on a screen file. A prompt will be displayed asking for the number of
the file to be edited. When the file number is input, the terminal calls up the OptiSCREEN program file in the Edit mode. Editing can be done as described in preceding
paragraphs. When one of the other special function keys is in operation (Show or Step,
for example), the Edit key is used to return to the Program File Edit mode.
Note
During editing, if another function is selected that conflicts with the
current file editing process, the message, ”SAVE EDITED CHANGES? (Y
or N):”, appears. It requires an operator response before the new
operation can be performed.
[F6] SHOW Key. You can go from the OptiSCREEN program file being edited to a display of the file as it is executed by pressing the [F6] SHOW key. Pressing the [F5] EDIT
key will return the display to the program file being edited at the same location it left.
[F7] STEP Key. In the Program File Edit mode, the program file execution can be viewed
one step at a time by pressing the [F7] STEP key. The file will be displayed as executed
up to the current cursor location in the OptiSCREEN statement listing. The next steps
will be displayed one at a time as executed by pressing the Cursor Down key.
The file can also be backed up by pressing the Cursor Up key; however, each time the
cursor is moved from one line to the next, it will be interpreted as an execute order,
regardless of the direction the cursor is moved. This may fill the screen with extraneous
4-16
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
4
graphics. Press the Edit key to return to the program file at the point where the Step
process was exited and then the Step procedure can be repeated.
[F10] VIEW Key. Other screen files may be displayed by pressing the [F10] VIEW key
and then entering the file number of the other file to be displayed. Once again, when
the [F5] EDIT key is pressed, the display will return to the current program file being
edited at the same place from which it left.
Note
When displaying a file using the Show, Step, or View functions of the
OptiSCREEN Editor, the file will be displayed using the configuration
that was saved from the main Configuration screen. Those functions
which affect the display of screens (such as Wrap, or Auto LF, etc.)
should be saved prior to using the editor.
Entering the File Edit Function
To enter the File Edit function follow the procedure below.
1.
Press either the [F5] EDIT key or the Select Edit File operation, number 1, from the
OptiSCREEN Editor menu. The message, ”Type file number:”, will appear.
2.
Type in the number of the file you wish to create, or, if you wish to edit an existing
file, the number of the file you wish to edit. Then press the Return key.
Once a screen file is selected for edit and the program is displayed, you can perform a
variety of operations such as SHOW and STEP and then return immediately to the
program of the file being edited by pressing the [F5] EDIT key. If you wish to edit a
different file, use the Select Edit File operation.
File Editing Operations
When you enter the Edit function, the screen clears and the cursor type selected (if
selected) appears in the upper left corner of the screen. You can now type the various
statements described in Chapter 5.
GFK-0361
Chapter 4 Operation
4-17
4
There are a number of editing operations that will help you construct a program for a
screen format. These are explained below.
Entering OptiSCREEN Commands The OptiSCREEN Editor does not require commands to be spelled out in their entirety, or even spelled correctly. The OptiSCREEN
Editor will match up an entry with the closest actual command When the line is terminated by pressing the [Return] key or moving off the line with a cursor key, the line is
evaluated and re-displayed with the actual statement and syntax.
If an invalid abbreviation is used, the programmer will immediately recognize that the
operating statement is different from the intended statement and can correct it.
Scrolling the Program When a program for a screen is listed in OptiSCREEN format,
each line on the display is a single OptiSCREEN statement. Up to 16 program lines can
be displayed at one time. OptiSCREEN programs that exceed 16 lines may be scrolled
up or down by a page of 15 lines using the [Page Up] and [Page Down] keys. When the
cursor is at the top or bottom of the screen, the [Cursor Up] and [Cursor Down] keys will
scroll the program up or down one line at a time. Pressing the [Ctrl] key and the [Page
Up] key [Ctrl]-[Page Up] or [Ctrl]-[Page Down] moves the editor to the beginning or end
of the file. The [Home] key moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line, while
the [End] key moves it to the end of the current line.
Inserting and Deleting Lines Lines may be inserted or deleted. Pressing [Ctrl]-[Insert]
will insert a new blank line in the program. Pressing [Ctrl]-[Delete] will delete a line
from the program.
Inserting and Deleting Characters Characters on a line may be inserted or deleted. The
Editor will initially be in the Replace mode; pressing the [Insert] key places the editor in
Insert Character mode. It will return to Replace mode as soon as the cursor is moved to
another line.
Program Comments The use of an apostrophe indicates a comment. A comment at the
beginning of a file becomes the file name. Comments in the body of the file must be separate line entries; they may not be added at the end of a line.
DISPLAY Statement Text Strings Quotation marks are used to indicate the start and
end of a DISPLAY text string. Including quotation marks within a text string can only be
achieved by repeating the quotation marks. For example, to display:
word ”data” word ;
Enter:
DISPLAY
”word ””data”” word”.
Non-displayable ASCII characters that are included in a DISPLAY text string will be
shown as an abbreviation surrounded by braces, e.g. {CR}, {LF}.
Saving, Renumbering, and Renaming a Screen File
To save a screen file:
4-18
1.
Return to the OptiSCREEN Editor screen. If you are displaying a screen file or
editing the screen program this is done by pressing [F1] UTIL.
2.
There are a number keys you can press to initiate the ”Save” operation. If you wish
to exit the OptiSCREEN Editor after saving, press the [F2] EXIT key. If you wish to
edit a different screen file after saving, press the number 1.
3.
After the ”Save” operation is initiated, prompts as shown below will appear. SAVE
EDITED CHANGES? (Y or N). Press Y to save or N if you do not want to save the
file.
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
4
To renumber a file:
After edits to a screen file have been saved, the following message appears, CHANGE
FILE NUMBER? (Y or N). If Y is pressed, the message, TYPE NEW FILE NUMBER,
appears. When the new file number has been entered, it flashes COMPLETED and
returns to the Configuration screen. The old file remains in the directory in the same
form it had before being edited.
To name or rename a screen file:
The file name is an optional part of the screen file. To name a file, enter the file name as
a comment on the first line of the screen file. To rename the file, simply change the
name in the first line.
Keyboard Operation
The keyboard is used to send data to your computer (programmable controller, CNC,
etc.) when the Mini OIT is in On-Line mode. In Local mode the keyboard sends
characters directly to the screen. In Edit mode, the keyboard is used to create screens
with the OptiSCREEN Editor.
The sections below describe the capabilities of the IBM PC-XT keyboard and the
65-position sealed keyboards. Not all keys will be found on all keyboards.
Note
The IBM PC-AT type keyboard is not compatible with the Mini OIT.
Alphabetic Keys
If an IBM PC-XT type full-travel keyboard or one of the 65-position sealed keyboards is
attached, any of the 26 letters of the alphabet may be entered. An IBM PC-XT compatible
keyboard will send either upper or lower-case letters, depending upon the state of the
Caps Lock key. The 65-position sealed keyboard will automatically send upper-case
letters unless the Shift key is simultaneously depressed, which will cause lower-case
letters to be sent. If the terminal has been configured for upper-case only in the
Configuration screen, only upper-case letters will be sent regardless of the state of the
keyboard.
Non-Alphabetic Keys
Non-alphabetic keys are those with double markings. These include the numbers 0
through 9, punctuation marks, and special characters. The lower marking is generated
when the Shift key is not depressed, while the upper marking is generated when the
Shift key is depressed.
Cursor Keys
The cursor and home keys transmit an escape sequence corresponding to their particular
function when they are pressed. The actual escape sequence will follow the ANSI
standard, VT-100, or VT-52 emulation, depending upon which mode the terminal is
GFK-0361
Chapter 4 Operation
4-19
4
using. For example, in the ANSI mode, Cursor Up sends {Esc} [ A, Cursor Home sends
{Esc} [ H.
As with all other keys, the terminal will not perform the function associated with the
keys in On-Line mode unless the host device echoes the data back, or the terminal has
been configured for Echo operation.
When the terminal is being used with other hosts that execute some form of BASIC, the
escape sequences sent by cursor keys can be difficult to use. In this case the command,
{Esc} [ > 15 h, can be sent to the terminal to totally disable the cursor keys so that they
do not transmit any codes.
Function Keys
Depending upon the keyboard, up to 10 separate function keys may be labeled. On
certain keyboards, fewer function keys may be shown: but with the use of the [Shift]
and [Control] keys, a total of 16 function keys may be accessible. The function keys are
designed to generate a sequence of key strokes that can be used either by the terminal or
a remote host to perform unique operations that could not otherwise be performed by a
single ASCII code.
In the Local mode, the function keys generate pre-defined escape sequences that select
or change screen and character attributes.
In the On-Line mode, the function keys will transmit or generate a user programmed
sequence of one to sixteen characters. After initialization of screen memory, the function
keys will have a default set of characters stored. The default definitions are ANSI escape
sequences that can be used by a remote host to recognize each key. [F1] through [F4]
correspond to the PF1 through PF4 keys on the DEC VT-100 terminal.
In the Edit mode, the function keys perform special pre-defined OptiSCREEN Editor
operations.
Miscellaneous Keys
The characteristics in the following descriptions apply only to the internal handling of
the listed functions. In No-Echo operation, functions such as Return, Line Feed, Space,
Back Space, and Delete, are transmitted to the host and will be acted on by the Mini OIT
only if the host retransmits the same functions back.
[Return] - Moves the cursor to the first character position of the line it is currently in. If
the cursor is already at the first character position, it remains there. Return may generate a line feed if Auto LF on CR has been selected.
[Line Feed] - Moves the cursor down one line. If the cursor is at the bottom line, Line
Feed causes it to remain there, but all of the data on the screen moves up one line. Data
on the top line is lost as it is shifted up and off the screen. [Line Feed] may generate a
return if Auto CR on LF has been selected.
[Space] - Moves the cursor one character position to the right. If the cursor was positioned on a displayed character, it will be replaced by a space. When a space occurs at
the end of the line, the cursor will remain there unless Wrap at End of Line mode has
been selected.
[Back Space] - Moves the cursor one space to the left. If the cursor is at the left end of
4-20
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
4
the line, the cursor will not move. Many forms of software use this key to delete the last
input character.
[Delete] - Transmits the ASCII code 7F (Hex). It is a non-displayable character. The host
computer software may use this to generate its own functions.
[Repeat] - When this key is depressed, any other key depressed will be repeatedly
transmitted at the lesser of 15 characters per second or the baud rate. On IBM PC compatible keyboards and keyboards used with the Mini OIT, all keys are designed to start
repeating after being depressed for approximately 1/2 second.
[Esc] (Escape) - A non-displayable character that transmits the ASCII code 1B (hex)/27
(decimal). This key is Escape used in combination with other keys to enter terminal commands. These commands are used to change screen attributes, move the cursor, store and recall
screens, plus many other operations.
[Break] - When this key is depressed and enabled as the Break key, a continuous space
level output is generated on the primary port. It is generally used to tell a host computer
that you wish to interrupt execution.
[Reset] - When the [Reset] key and the [Shift] key are pressed at the same time, the Mini
OIT is reset to its power-up condition and the display is cleared.
Control Keys
The Control [Ctrl] key is held down in conjunction with other keys to send the 32 ASCII
control codes (0-31). These are non-displayable characters. The Mini OIT responds to
only nine control characters. They are:
Bell (BEL or [Ctrl]-G) - Not used with the Mini OIT.
Back Space (BS or [Ctrl]-H) - Duplicates the [Back Space] key.
Tab (HT or [Ctrl]-I) - Software controlled to move the cursor to the next tab stop (8 character spaces) to the right. The tab stops are fixed at columns 9, 17, 25, 33, 41, 49, 57, 65,
and 73. If the cursor is in columns 73 through 79, each time [TAB] is received, the cursor
will only move one character position to the right. If the cursor is at column 80, it will
not move.
Line Feed (LF or [Ctrl]-J) - Duplicates the [Line Feed] key.
Carriage Return (CR or [Ctrl]-M) - Duplicates the [Return] key.
Shift In ([Ctrl]-O) - Exits supplemental graphics for current character set (alternate
mode to using corresponding escape sequence, VT-100 compatible).
Shift Out ([Ctrl]-N) - Enters supplemental graphics for current character set (alternate
mode to using corresponding escape sequence, VT-100 compatible).
Cancel ([Ctrl]-X) - Cancels the current escape sequence.
Escape (Esc or [Ctrl]-[) - Duplicates the [Esc] key.
Private Control Keys
[Ctrl]-1 - When entered from the keyboard, [Ctrl]-1 causes the terminal to go to the
Configuration screen.
[Ctrl]-2 - Loads user memory with data from the STR-LINK III.
[Ctrl]-3 - Saves user memory using the STR-LINK III.
[Ctrl]-4 - Compares user memory with data from the STR-LINK III digital cartridge controller.
GFK-0361
Chapter 4 Operation
4-21
Chapter
5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5
section level 1 1
figure bi level 1
table_big level 1
This chapter explains how each OptiSCREEN command works, and many examples are
included. At the end of the chapter is a summary of the commands.
The OptiSCREEN editor converts each of the commands to its corresponding
internally-stored escape code. The OptiSCREEN editor was developed to make screen
file programming easier, faster, and more efficient.
OptiSCREENCommand Types
The Mini OIT has ten major types of OptiSCREEN commands. These types are briefly
described below.
Comment and End of File
The comment sets off text as documentation for the screen file. Any comment found on
the first line of an OptiSCREEN file also appears when you display the directory.
Comments also identify the purpose of commands and sections of files for yourself and
other users. The OptiSCREEN editor automatically inserts the END command at the
end of each OptiSCREEN file.
Cursor
These commands control the appearance and location of the cursor on the screen.
During operation, the location of the cursor determines the starting position for text and
graphics on the screen. Examples of cursor commands include NO CURSOR and the
MOVE TO command.
Character Attribute
These change the video attributes of all characters displayed after the command.
Examples of character attribute commands include BLINK, SUPPLEMENTAL, QUAD,
DIM, and /BRIGHT.
Line Attribute
These set the video attributes for a single line of text on the screen. Examples of line
attribute commands include DOUBLE SIZE TOP LINE/DOUBLE SIZE BOTTOM LINE
and DOUBLE WIDE LINE.
GFK-0361
5-1
5
Display
The DISPLAY command is one of the most commonly used commands in the
OptiSCREEN editor. You can generate text and graphics for your application with the
DISPLAY command.
File Display
The file display commands display other screen files, allowing you to ”call” other
OptiSCREEN files. An example of the file display command is DISPLAY FILE FROM
BANK.
Erasing and Editing
The erasing and editing commands allow you to perform a number of operations that
edit text and graphics which already appear on the screen: clear the screen or a portion
of the screen, insert new text, or specify a scrolling region for text or graphics. Examples
of erasing and editing commands include CLEAR SCREEN, DELETE LINE, and
SCROLL.
Graphics
The graphics commands draw boxes, change the video attributes for boxed regions of
the screen, and draw bar graphs. Examples of graphic commands include BOX, EMPTY
BOX, BOX ATTRIBUTES, and HORIZONTAL BAR GRAPH.
Programmable Keyboard, Touch Screen, and Function Key
These commands allow you to set and use the programmable keyboard, touch screen
and function key capabilities of a Mini OIT. Examples of these commands include
CLEAR KEY TABLE, DISPLAY KEY TABLE, MAKE TOUCH BOX and LOAD KEY. The
LOAD FUNCTION KEY command loads the available function keys for a Mini OIT.
User Programmable I/O Mode Commands
These commands are used to control the parallel port in User Programmable I/O mode.
Data Fill Operations
You may create an OptiSCREEN file with numerous blanks left for the host to fill with
data. The file creation and appending procedures allow you to create the screen file
using the [Ctrl]-E (ENQ, enquiry) control character for the locations on the screen where
the system displays data.
Conventionsfor the OptiSCREEN Commands
This summary lists and describes all of the commands used in the OptiSCREEN editor.
All OptiSCREEN command listings follow the format shown below:
5-2
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
5
COMMAND FORM {ESC}xxx
A short description of the command follows the headline command form. Elements that
appear in UPPERCASE LETTERS of the command form are required elements of the
command. Elements that appear in lowercase letters are parameters that you supply. A
summary of acceptable parameters appears in the description.
Example: A short explanation appears before the example of the command.
OPTISCREEN COMMAND 1
OPTISCREEN COMMAND 2
SSS
OPTISCREEN COMMAND n
Each of the OptiSCREEN commands appear under the heading in which the command
is summarized above. An alphabetic summary of the individual commands appears at
the end of the chapter.
The Comment Command and the End of File Command
The comment command and the end of file command are two important commands for
the OptiSCREEN system.
’comment
OptiSCREEN treats all text following an apostrophe (’) as a comment.
comment
specifies that the rest of the line is a comment. You can only place the
comment at the beginning of the line.
When you make the first line of an OptiSCREEN file a comment, the first 25 characters
of the comment line also appear when you generate a directory of OptiSCREEN files.
Example: Give a comment that you might want to place as the first line of an
OptiSCREEN file. When you generate a directory of OptiSCREEN files, the system
labels this file as Fluid Level, Tanks 1,2,3:
’Fluid Level, Tanks 1,2,3
END {EOT}
The END command indicates the end of the OptiSCREEN screen file. The OptiSCREEN
editor automatically adds the END command to each file that you create.
Cursor Commands
The cursor commands control the appearance of the cursor and specify the location for
the cursor on the screen. During operation, the location of the cursor determines the
starting position for text and graphics on the screen.
Controlling the Appearance of the Cursor
The following commands determine whether or not the cursor appears on the screen,
the appearance of the cursor, and the blinking or non-blinking characteristics of the
cursor.
GFK-0361
Chapter 5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5-3
5
CURSOR or ENABLE CURSOR {ESC}[>5l
NO CURSOR or DISABLE CURSOR {ESC}[>5h
The CURSOR and ENABLE CURSOR commands make the cursor visible so that it
appears on the screen. The two commands are identical.
The NO CURSOR and DISABLE CURSOR commands disable the cursor so that it does
not appear on the screen. The two commands are identical.
BLOCK CURSOR {ESC}[>4h
UNDERLINE CURSOR {ESC}[>4l
The BLOCK CURSOR command makes the cursor appear as a solid block on the screen.
The UNDERLINE CURSOR command makes the cursor appear as an underline
character on the screen.
BLINKING CURSOR {ESC}[>11l
STEADY CURSOR {ESC}[>11h
The BLINKING CURSOR command makes a block or underline cursor blink as it
appears on the screen. To make a block of text blink, use the BLINK command.
The STEADY CURSOR command makes a block or underline cursor non-blinking as it
appears on the screen.
Controlling the Location of the Cursor
The following commands determine the location of the cursor on the screen.
HOME
{ESC}[H or {ESC}[f
The HOME cursor command moves the cursor to the home position at row 1 and
column 1.
Example: The underlined number 1 appears in the home position below.
12345678911111111112222222222333333333344444444445555555555666666666677777777778
2
01234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
3
4
< < < Columns 1 through 80 > > >
5
6
7
8
^
9
^
10 ^
_ MOVE TO 10, 40
11 Rows
12 1
13 through
_ UP 2
14 16
15 ^
_ DOWN 5
_ RIGHT 15
16 ^
MOVE TO rr, {ESC}[ rrr f
MOVE TO rr, cc {ESC}[rrr;ccc f or {ESC}[rrr;ccc H
This command positions the cursor on the screen at a specified row and column position.
5-4
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
5
rr - specifies row 1 to 16, inclusive. If you specify a row that does not exist, the cursor
remains in the current row.
cc - specifies column 1 to 80, inclusive. If you do not specify a column, the cursor moves
to row rr and column 1. If you specify a column that does not exist, the cursor moves to
column 80.
Example 1: Move the cursor to row 10 and column 40.
MOVE TO 10, 40
Example 2: Both of the following commands move the cursor to row 15 and column 1.
MOVE TO 15,
MOVE TO 15, 1
DOWN {ESC}[B
DOWN nn {ESC}[ nnn B
This command moves the cursor down the screen.
nn - specifies the number of rows to move. If you do not specify the number of rows,
this command moves the cursor down one row.
A screen always contains 16 rows. If the cursor is in row 16, it remains there.
Example: Move the cursor down 5 lines.
DOWN 5
UP {ESC}[A
UP nn {ESC}[ nnn A
This command moves the cursor up the screen.
nn - specifies the number of rows to move. If you do not specify the number of rows,
this command moves the cursor up one row.
A screen always contains 16 rows. If the cursor is in row 1, it remains there.
Example: Move the cursor up four rows.
UP 4
LEFT {ESC}[D
LEFT nn {ESC}[ nnn D
This command moves the cursor to the left.
nn - specifies the number of columns, or character cells, to move. If you do not specify
the number of columns, this command moves the cursor left one column.
A screen always contains 80 columns. If the cursor is in column 1, it remains there.
Example: Move the cursor left seven spaces.
LEFT 7
RIGHT {ESC}[C
RIGHT nn {ESC}[ nnn C
This command moves the cursor to the right.
GFK-0361
Chapter 5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5-5
5
nn - specifies the number of columns, or character cells, to move. If you do not specify
the number of columns, it moves the cursor one column to the right.
A screen always contains 80 columns. If the cursor is in column 80, it remains there.
Example: Move the cursor right six spaces.
RIGHT 6
INDEX
{ESC}D
This command invokes the line feed to move the cursor down one row. If the cursor is
on the bottom row, it remains there.
REVERSE INDEX
{ESC}M
This command reverses the line feed to move the cursor up one row. If the cursor is on
the top row, it remains there and scrolls text on the screen down one line.
NEW LINE {ESC}E
This command moves the cursor down one row and automatically moves to the
beginning of the new line.
LINE rr {ESC}[ rrr f or {ESC}[ rrr H
This command moves the cursor to the beginning of specified line 1 to 16, inclusive.
rr - specifies the line, or row, number.
A screen always displays 16 rows.
Example: Move the cursor to row 4, column 1.
LINE 4
SAVE POSITION {ESC}7 or {ESC}[s
RESTORE POSITION {ESC}8 or {ESC}[u
The SAVE POSITION command stores the current location of the cursor so that you can
return to that location. The RESTORE POSITION command returns the cursor to the
stored location.
Example: Display an OptiSCREEN file. After the system displays the file, store the
position of the cursor, display two other files, and then return to the stored position that
you specified earlier.
DISPLAY FILE 10
SAVE POSITION
DISPLAY FILE 21
DISPLAY FILE 22
RESTORE POSITION
Character Attribute Commands
Character attribute commands change the video attributes of all characters displayed
after the command.
5-6
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
5
BLINK {ESC}[5m
EXIT DOUBLE WIDE AND BLINK {ESC}[22m
The BLINK command establishes blinking as the current character attribute mode. After
you issue the BLINK command, all subsequent text and graphics slowly flash off and on.
(To make the cursor blink, use the BLINKING CURSOR command.)
The EXIT DOUBLE WIDE AND BLINK character attribute command resets the double
wide and blink character attributes to normal. This command does not change the
foreground or background intensity. The RESET ATTRIBUTES command resets the
blink condition as well as all character attributes to the default: normal size, normal
color or intensity, no underlining, and no reversed intensities.
Example: Create a single line text message with only the word Warning blinking.
MOVE TO 5, 15
BLINK
DISPLAY ”WARNING ”
EXIT DOUBLE WIDE AND BLINK
DISPLAY ” OVEN TEMPERATURE HIGH!”
REVERSED {ESC}[7m
The REVERSED command establishes reverse video as the current character attribute
mode; normally the characters appear as a light character on a dark background. The
background intensity level (bright, dim, or normal) appears the same as the previously
specified foreground.
The RESET ATTRIBUTES command resets the reversed attribute as well as all character
attributes to the default: normal size, normal intensity, no blink, and no underlining.
Example: Display a two line message. Make the second line use reversed characters to
highlight it.
MOVE TO 5, 28
DISPLAY ”Crusher not moving”
REVERSED
MOVE TO 7, 20
DISPLAY ”Check with operator for information”
RESET ATTRIBUTES
SUPPLEMENTAL {ESC}[11m or {SO}
EXIT SUPPLEMENTAL {ESC}[10m or {SI}
The SUPPLEMENTAL command establishes the supplemental character set as the
current character attribute mode. The supplemental character set consists of the
numbers from 0 to 9, the uppercase letters from A to Z, most punctuation marks, and 33
supplemental graphics characters. You specify the supplemental graphics with
lowercase letters from a to z and special symbols. A summary and comparison of the
standard, supplemental, quad, and double wide characters appears at the end of the
discussion of these characters.
The EXIT SUPPLEMENTAL command exits the supplemental character set. This
command does not change any other character or line attribute settings.
GFK-0361
Chapter 5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5-7
5
Example: Display a small box generated with supplemental characters.
MOVE TO 5, 20
SUPPLEMENTAL
DISPLAY ”lk”
MOVE TO 6, 20
DISPLAY ”mj”
EXIT SUPPLEMENTAL
QUAD SIZE {ESC}[16m
EXIT QUAD {ESC}[17m
The QUAD SIZE command establishes quad size characters as the current character
attribute mode. All characters cover the positions from the cursor to the right four
character cells and up four lines.
The quad size character set includes the capital letters A through Z, the numerals 0
through 9, and the comma (,), the period (.), the asterisk (*), the plus sign (+), the minus
sign (-), the equals sign (=), the slash (/), and the question mark (?). A summary and
comparison of the standard, supplemental, quad, and double wide characters appears at
the end of the discussion of these characters.
Quad size characters in column 78, 79, and 80 wrap to the next available row (four rows
below the current row) and scroll, if necessary, after you specify WRAP AT END OF
LINE. This allows you to use the Mini OIT as a quad size message display. After you
specify quad size characters, text information sent to the Mini OIT in online mode is
correctly displayed and scrolled even when the message exceeds a line or the screen size.
The EXIT QUAD command exits the quad size character set. This command does not
change any other character or line attribute settings.
Example: Display a message in quad-sized letters and then exit the QUAD character
attribute mode.
MOVE TO 5, 10
QUAD SIZE
DISPLAY ”IN PROGRESS”
EXIT QUAD
ALTERNATE {ESC}[12m
EXIT ALTERNATE {ESC}[13m
The ALTERNATE command establishes the alternate character set as the current
character attribute mode. The alternate character set consists of 128 graphics characters.
You specify the alternate character set with the numbers from 0 to 9, the uppercase
letters from A to Z, the lower case letters from a to z, and the special symbols.
The supplemental alternate character set gives you a number of additional special
graphic symbols. A summary and comparison of the standard, supplemental, alternate,
and quad character sets appears at the end of the discussion of these characters.
The EXIT ALTERNATE command exits the alternate character set.
5-8
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
5
Example: Display two characters from the standard character set and then display a
graphic symbol (an ascending diagonal line) from the alternate character set.
LINE 10
DISPLAY “lm”
ALTERNATE
DISPLAY “lm”
UP
DISPLAY “lm”
EXIT ALTERNATE
DOUBLE WIDE {ESC}[15m
EXIT DOUBLE WIDE AND BLINK {ESC}[22m
The DOUBLE WIDE command establishes double wide characters as the current
character attribute mode. The cursor automatically increments two positions for both
characters and spaces, but only increments one position for the backspace character.
Cursor movements are still performed one position at a time although the position after
the double wide character does not appear. Double wide characters in column 80 wrap
to the next row and scroll, if necessary, after you specify WRAP AT END OF LINE. A
summary and comparison of the standard, supplemental, quad, and double wide
character set appears at the end of the discussion of these characters.
The EXIT DOUBLE WIDE AND BLINK command resets the double wide and blink
character attributes to normal. The RESET ATTRIBUTES command does NOT reset the
DOUBLE WIDE command to normal.
Example: Display double wide text and then return to the normal character attribute
mode.
DOUBLE WIDE
MOVE TO 5, 10
DISPLAY ”New Instructions”
MOVE TO 7, 20
EXIT DOUBLE WIDE AND BLINK
DISPLAY ”For Loading”
Comparison of Various Character Attribute Modes
The following chart shows the similarities and the differences between the ASCII codes
and the standard, supplemental, and quad size character modes. (Drawings of the
graphics characters appear in Appendix B.) To use the chart, determine the ASCII code
for the character that you want to print, find the column that holds the number, and look
down the column to see the various outputs available for the character in the different
modes.
For example, the letter a is ASCII number 97. In standard character mode, it produces
the lower letter a, but in supplemental character mode, it produces a ”checker board”
pattern.
The caret (^) is ASCII number 94. In standard character mode, it produces a caret, but
in supplemental character mode, it produces a a vertical bar.
GFK-0361
Chapter 5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5-9
5
Table 5-1. Character/Graphics Modes and ASCII Codes
Character
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
Standard
0 to 9
A to Z
a to z
space
! ’’ # $
%&’
()*+
,–./
: ;
<=>
? @
[\]
^ _ ‘
{ | } ~
Supple–
mental
0 to 9
A to Z
graphics
space
! ’’ # $
%&’
()*+
,–./
: ;
<=>
? @
[\]
and
graphics
graphics
Quad Size
0 to 9
A to Z
blank
= ?
blank
blank
Alternate
Supple–
mental
Alternate
graphics
same
graphics
graphics
same
graphics
graphics
different
graphics
space
!*+,
–./
graphics
same
graphics
graphics
same
graphics
graphics
different
graphics
blank
blank
Standard
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII codes are decimal representations. Drawings of the graphics characters appear in
Appendix B.
RESET ATTRIBUTES
{ESC}[m or {ESC}[0m
The RESET ATTRIBUTES command resets all character attributes to the default: normal
size, normal intensity, no blink, no underlining, and no reversed intensities. The RESET
ATTRIBUTES command does not change the character set from supplemental, or quad;
nor does it affect line attributes.
BRIGHT {ESC}[33m
/BRIGHT {ESC}[43m
The BRIGHT command sets the foreground intensity level to higher than normal.
/BRIGHT sets the background intensity level to higher than normal.
Example: Display information with normal text and the warning in bright text.
NORMAL
MOVE TO
DISPLAY
BRIGHT
MOVE TO
DISPLAY
NORMAL
MOVE TO
DISPLAY
DIM
/DIM
5, 1
”Bin 1 OK”
7, 1
”CHECK BIN 2”
9, 1
”Bin 3 OK”
{ESC}[31m
{ESC}[41m
The DIM command sets the foreground intensity level lower than normal. /DIM sets the
background intensity level to lower than normal.
5-10
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
5
Example: Display dim text over a dark background and bright text over a dim
background.
MOVE TO 5, 10
DIM
/DARK
DISPLAY ”Staging area ”
BRIGHT
/DIM
DISPLAY ”Overloaded”
RESET ATTRIBUTES
DARK {ESC}[30m
/DARK {ESC}[40m
The DARK command sets the foreground intensity level to dark. /DARK sets the
background intensity level to dark.
NORMAL {ESC}[32m
/NORMAL {ESC}[42m
The NORMAL command sets the foreground intensity level to normal. /NORMAL sets
the background intensity level to normal.
Example: Display normal text, bright text, and return to normal again.
NORMAL
MOVE TO
DISPLAY
BRIGHT
MOVE TO
DISPLAY
NORMAL
MOVE TO
DISPLAY
5, 20
”Step 1 Complete”
7, 20
”Step 2 In Process”
9, 20
”Step 3 Scheduled, Not Done”
UNDERLINE {ESC}[36m
BRIGHT UNDERLINE {ESC}[>37rDIM UNDERLINE
{ESC}[35m
The UNDERLINE command sets the foreground intensity level to normal and
underlines the text. The BRIGHT UNDERLINE command sets the foreground intensity
level higher than normal and underlines the text. The DIM UNDERLINE command sets
the foreground intensity level lower than normal and underlines the text.
The RESET ATTRIBUTES command resets all underlining modes as well as all character
attributes to the default: normal size, normal intensity, no blink, and no reversed
intensities.
Example 1: Display a line of underlined text.
UNDERLINE
DISPLAY ”Bin Full”
RESET ATTRIBUTES
Example 2: Display a message with one word underlined with a bright underline.
BRIGHT
DISPLAY ”System 1 loading ”
BRIGHT UNDERLINE
DISPLAY ”NOW”
RESET ATTRIBUTES
GFK-0361
Chapter 5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5-11
5
ATTRIBUTES: nn, nn {ESC} nnn; nnn m
The ATTRIBUTES command establishes two character attributes as the current character
attribute mode or modes.
nn specifies a character attribute mode number from the table given below.
Each OptiSCREEN character attribute command offers an identical ATTRIBUTE
command; for example, the ATTRIBUTE: 15 command and the DOUBLE WIDE
command are identical. The ATTRIBUTE mode numbers and their paired character
attribute commands are listed below:
Mode
Character Attribute Command
0
1
2
4
5
7
10
11
14
15
16
17
22
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
RESET ATTRIBUTES
BRIGHT
DIM
UNDERLINE
BLINK
REVERSE
EXITSUPPLEMENTAL
SUPPLEMENTAL
BRIGHT and /DIM (sometimes called ”shade”)
DOUBLE WIDE
QUAD SIZE
EXIT QUAD SIZE
EXIT DOUBLE WIDE AND BLINK
DARK
DIM
NORMAL
BRIGHT
DARK
DIMUNDERLINE
UNDERLINE
BRIGHTUNDERLINE
/DARK
/DIM
/NORMAL
/BRIGHT
/DARK
/DIM
/NORMAL
/BRIGHT
Example: Display bright characters on a dim background.
ATTRIBUTES: 33, 41
DISPLAY ”This is bright underline foreground on normal background”
Line Attribute Commands
Line attribute commands set the video attributes for a single line of text on the screen.
5-12
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
5
DOUBLE SIZE TOP LINE {ESC}#3
DOUBLE SIZE BOTTOM LINE {ESC}#4
These two commands are normally used together to establish double size as the current
line attribute mode. Double size characters extend from the current cursor position up
one line so that each double size character appears two character cells tall and one
character cell wide. Since these commands are line attribute commands, only double
size characters can appear on the lines specified.
The RESET LINE ATTRIBUTES command resets the DOUBLE SIZE TOP/BOTTOM
attribute as well as all line attributes to single height and single width characters.
Example: Display a single line of double-sized text.
MOVE TO 4, 20
DOUBLE SIZE TOP LINE
DISPLAY ”ALPHA CORP.”
MOVE TO 5, 20
DOUBLE SIZE BOTTOM LINE
DISPLAY ”ALPHA CORP.”
MOVE TO 9, 20
DOUBLE SIZE TOP LINE
DISPLAY ”Distribution System”
MOVE TO 10, 20
DOUBLE SIZE BOTTOM LINE
DISPLAY ”Distribution System”
DOUBLE WIDE LINE
{ESC}#6
This command establishes double-wide characters for an entire line of characters on the
screen.
Example: Display a single line of double-wide text and a line of normal text.
MOVE TO 5, 20
DOUBLE WIDE LINE
DISPLAY ”Sprayer Operating”
MOVE TO 10, 26
DISPLAY ”Do not change setting”
SINGLE SIZE LINE
{ESC}#5
This command establishes an entire line of single-sized characters on the screen. An
example of this command appears below under the RESET LINE ATTRIBUTES
command.
RESET LINE ATTRIBUTES
{ESC}#0
This command resets all line attributes to the default operating mode with single height
and single width characters.
Example: Display the words INPUT and OUTPUT with double wide characters. After
each of the words, display location n with normal characters. Use the SINGLE SIZE
LINE command to reset the first occurrence of double wide characters; use the RESET
LINE ATTRIBUTES command to reset the second occurrence.
MOVE TO 5, 5
DOUBLE WIDE LINE
DISPLAY ”INPUT ”
GFK-0361
Chapter 5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5-13
5
SINGLE SIZE LINE
DISPLAY ”location 1”
DOUBLE WIDE LINE
DISPLAY ” OUTPUT ”
RESET LINE ATTRIBUTES
DISPLAY ”location 2”
Display and File Display Commands
The display and file display commands are two of the most commonly used commands
in the OptiSCREEN editor. With the DISPLAY command, you can generate text and
graphics for your application. With the DISPLAY FILE command, you can ”call” (or
display) other OptiSCREEN files, file memory, or a directory of files.
“text” text
DISPLAY ”text” text
These commands display a string of text that you specify.
text - represents the string that you want to display.
Text strings surrounded by quotes operate the same as the DISPLAY ”text” command.
Example 1: Display a three word message.
”Message for Viewing”
Example 2: Display a five word message.
DISPLAY ”This is a text message”
DISPLAY FILE nn {ESC}[> nnn w
DISPLAY FILE nn FROM BANK pp {ESC}[> nnn; ppp w
This command displays another screen file.
nn - specifies the number of the file that you want to display.
pp - specifies the number of the bank in which the file resides.
Example 1: Display the results of the command sequence stored in file 30.
DISPLAY FILE 30
Example 2: Display the results of the command sequence stored in file 5, bank 01.
DISPLAY FILE 5 FROM BANK 01
Erasing and Editing Commands
The erasing and editing commands allow you to perform a number of operations that
edit text and graphics which already appear on the screen: clear the screen or a portion
of the screen, insert new text, or specify a scrolling region for text or graphics.
Clearing the Screen
With the following commands, you can clear the whole screen or a portion of the screen,
clear a line or a part of a line, or clear individual characters.
5-14
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
5
CLEAR SCREEN {ESC}[2J
This command moves the cursor to the home position at row 1 and column 1, clears the
entire screen, and resets all attributes to normal. Examples of this command appear
throughout this summary.
CLEAR SCREEN FROM CURSOR {ESC}[0J
This command clears the screen from the current cursor position to the end of the
screen.
Example: Generate two lines of text, move to the middle of the first line, and delete the
screen below and to the right of the cursor. The result is a line that reads ”Part”.
MOVE TO 5, 20
DISPLAY ”Part one”
MOVE TO 6, 20
DISPLAY ”Second section”
MOVE TO 5, 24
CLEAR SCREEN FROM CURSOR
CLEAR SCREEN TO CURSOR {ESC}[1J
This command clears the screen from the home position (at row 1 and column 1) to the
current cursor position.
Example: Generate two lines of text, move to the middle of the second line, and delete
the screen above and to the left of the cursor. The result is a line that reads ”two” only.
MOVE TO 5, 20
DISPLAY ”First part”
MOVE TO 6, 20
DISPLAY ”Part two”
MOVE TO 6, 24
CLEAR SCREEN TO CURSOR
CLEAR LINE {ESC}[2K
This command clears the contents of the entire line on which the cursor rests. This
command erases the cursor although the cursor does not move.
Example: Generate a line of text, move to the middle of the line, and delete the entire
line.
MOVE TO 5, 20
DISPLAY ”First line”
MOVE TO 5, 25
CLEAR LINE
CLEAR LINE FROM CURSOR {ESC}[0K
This command clears the contents of the line from the current cursor position, including
the character on which the cursor rests, to the end of the line. The cursor does not move.
Example: Generate a line of text, move to the middle of the line, and delete the line to
the right of the cursor. The result is a line that reads ”Second” only.
MOVE TO 5, 20
DISPLAY ”Second line”
GFK-0361
Chapter 5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5-15
5
MOVE TO 5, 26
CLEAR LINE FROM CURSOR
CLEAR LINE TO CURSOR {ESC}[1K
This command clears the line from the beginning of the line to the current position of
the cursor including the character on which the cursor rests. The cursor does not move.
Example: Generate a line of text, move to the middle of the line, and delete the line to
the left of the cursor. The result is a line that reads ”test” only.
MOVE TO 5, 20
DISPLAY ”Third test”
MOVE TO 5, 25
CLEAR LINE TO CURSOR
DELETE LINE
{ESC}[M
This command deletes the entire line on which the cursor rests.
The cursor moves to the line following the deleted line. The DELETE LINE command
scrolls the existing text below the deleted line up the screen and adds a blank line at the
bottom of the screen.
Example: Generate five lines of text, then remove the first line of text and the last two
lines of text leaving lines two and three displayed.
MOVE TO 5, 1
DISPLAY ”Line
NEW LINE
DISPLAY ”Line
NEW LINE
DISPLAY ”Line
NEW LINE
DISPLAY ”Line
NEW LINE
DISPLAY ”Line
MOVE TO 5, 5
DELETE LINE
DOWN 2
DELETE LINE
DELETE LINE
One”
Two”
Three”
Four”
Five”
DELETE CHARACTER {ESC}[P
This command deletes the character that the cursor covers.
Any characters to the right of the deleted character shift left and the cursor covers the
character after the last deleted character.
Example: Enter a line of text, move to the middle of the line, and delete a single
character and the space following the character. The result is a line that reads ”Test
character ”.
MOVE TO 5, 20
DISPLAY ”Test 1 character”
MOVE TO 5, 25
DELETE CHARACTER
DELETE CHARACTER
Inserting Text
The following commands allow you to insert text or graphics into already existing text or
graphics.
5-16
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
5
INSERT LINE {ESC}[L
This command inserts a single line at the line on which the cursor rests.
After the insertion, the cursor rests on the single inserted lines. The INSERT command
scrolls the existing text toward the bottom of the screen.
Example: Insert a single line and add text into the middle of several other lines of text.
MOVE TO 5, 1
DISPLAY ”Line one”
NEW LINE
DISPLAY ”Line two”
NEW LINE
DISPLAY ”Line three”
NEW LINE
DISPLAY ”Line four”
NEW LINE
DISPLAY ”Line five”
MOVE TO 7, 1
INSERT LINE
DISPLAY ”Insert text”
SCROLL LINES nn TO pp {ESC}[ nnn; ppp r
The SCROLL LINES command causes a specified area of the screen to scroll up.
nn - specifies the top line of the scrolling area.
pp - specifies the bottom line of the scrolling area.
After you specify text or graphics to appear on the scrolling lines, the text or graphics
shift up one row at a time. Screen data outside of the scrolling lines does not move or
change, nor does the cursor position change as the text or graphics scroll through the
lines.
Example: Define a scrolling area and delimit it with a line of text both before and after
(File 1). Display a separate text file (File 2) in the scrolling area and display the word
Done after you’ve completed the display.
File No: 1
MOVE TO 5, 1
DISPLAY ”--- Top ---”
SCROLL LINES 6 TO 8
MOVE TO 9, 1
DISPLAY ”--- Bottom --”
MOVE TO 6, 1
DISPLAY FILE 2
MOVE TO 10, 1
DISPLAY ”- Done -”
SCROLL LINES 1 to 16 (This line is needed to reset the scrolling
function.)
File No: 2
DISPLAY ”Line
NEW LINE
DISPLAY ”Line
NEW LINE
DISPLAY ”Line
NEW LINE
DISPLAY ”Line
NEW LINE
DISPLAY ”Line
GFK-0361
1”
2”
3”
4”
5”
Chapter 5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5-17
5
Graphics Commands
The graphics commands draw boxes, change the video attributes for boxed regions of
the screen, and draw bar graphs:
D
D
The BOX command draws a box around text or graphics.
D
D
The FILL BOX command draws a box and fills it with a single character.
The EMPTY BOX command draws a box and erases any text or graphics that appear
inside.
The BOX ATTRIBUTES command defines the character attributes (such as color) for
a boxed region; this is helpful for defining a color for a region.
Each of these ”box” commands is described before the bar graph commands are
described.
Generating Boxes and Boxed Regions
The following commands draw boxes from the lower left-hand corner of the box or
define a boxed region.
BOX rr X cc
{ESC}[= rrr, ccc d
This command creates an outlined box.
rr - specifies the number of rows up from the cursor that the box extends.
cc - specifies the number of columns to the right from the cursor that the box extends.
The system draws boxes from the lower left-hand corner of the box. Legal cursor
positions fall between rows 1 to 25 and between columns 1 to 80. If a box exceeds a legal
cursor position, the box wraps around to the opposite side or opposite end of the screen.
The lines used for the box outline are two character dots wide and two scan lines high.
Both the row specification rr and the column specification cc must be greater than or
equal to 2. The BOX command does not change the existing text within a box.
Example 1: Draw two boxes surrounding text in the center of the screen. The first box
outlines the text as closely as possible. The second box borders the entire screen.
MOVE TO 6, 36
DISPLAY ”GE Fanuc”
MOVE TO 7, 35
BOX 3 x 10
MOVE TO 15, 1
BOX 15 x 80
5-18
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
5
GE Fanuc
Start
here:
MOVE TO 15, 1
BOX 15 x 80
|
|
|
↑


Start
here:
MOVE TO 7,
35
BOX 3 x 10
…
Example 2: Character attributes affect both text and boxes. For example, if you create a
box after a DOUBLE WIDE command, the box covers twice as many characters cells as
the command states since the system doubles the box width. The following commands
draw two double wide text messages surrounded by boxes. The first box appears as a
double wide box and the second box appears with normal character attributes.
DOUBLE WIDE
MOVE TO 5, 20
DISPLAY ”BOX 1”
MOVE TO 6, 18
BOX 3 x 7
MOVE TO 15, 20
DISPLAY ”BOX 2”
EXIT DOUBLE WIDE AND BLINK
MOVE TO 16, 19
BOX 3 x 11
EMPTY BOX rr X cc
{ESC}[= rrr; ccc e
This command creates an empty box. This command erases any text or graphics that
previously appeared in the boxed region.
rr -specifies the number of rows up from the cursor that the box extends.
cc -specifies the number of columns to the right from the cursor that the box extends.
The system draws boxes from the lower left-hand corner of the box. Legal cursor
positions fall between rows 1 to 16 and between columns 1 to 80. If a box exceeds a legal
cursor position, the box wraps around to the opposite side or opposite end of the screen.
The lines used for the box outline are two character dots wide and two scan lines high.
Both the row specification rr and the column specification cc must be greater than or
equal to 2.
GFK-0361
Chapter 5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5-19
5
Example: Create an empty box 12 rows tall by 40 columns wide.
MOVE TO 15, 20
EMPTY BOX 12 X 40
FILL BOX rr X cc WITH ”a” {ESC} rrr; ccc b a
This command creates a box and fills it with a single character.
rr - specifies the number of rows up from the cursor that the box extends.
cc - specifies the number of columns to the right from the cursor that the box extends.
a - specifies the single ”fill character” value that fills the boxed area. The fill character
uses the current foreground and background character attribute settings. If you specify
the fill character as a space (a non-printing character), this command fills the region with
the setting currently specified by the background attribute.
The system draws boxes from the lower left-hand corner of the box. Legal cursor
positions fall between rows 1 to 25 and between columns 1 to 80. If a box exceeds a legal
cursor position, the box wraps around to the opposite side or opposite end of the screen.
The lines used for the box outline are two character dots wide and two scan lines high.
Both the row specification rr and the column specification cc must be greater than or
equal to 2.
Example: Fill a box 12 rows by 40 columns with the letter X.
MOVE TO 15, 5
FILL BOX 12 X 40 WITH ”X”
BOX ATTRIBUTES rr X cc {ESC}[= rrr; ccc a
This command applies the currently defined character attributes to a boxed region.
rr - specifies the number of rows up from the cursor that the box extends.
cc - specifies the number of columns to the right from the cursor that the box extends.
The system determines box attribute regions from the lower left-hand corner of the box.
Legal cursor positions fall between rows 1 to 16 and between columns 1 to 80. If a box
exceeds a legal cursor position, the box wraps around to the opposite side or opposite
end of the screen. The lines used for the box outline are two character dots wide and
two scan lines high. Both the row specification rr and the column specification cc must
be greater than or equal to 2.
This command does not erase or rewrite any text or graphics that already exist in the box
attribute region; it only changes the character attributes for the text or graphics in the
region. This command is useful for defining and changing the colors or intensities for
text on a screen without rewriting the text after the change.
Example: Define a line of text to read Blower off ON. Then define two sets of box
attribute regions. The first box attribute region displays the word off with the default
intensity and the word ON in black so that it is hidden. The second box attribute region
displays the word off in black so that it is hidden and the word ON in bright on a dim
background so that it is highlighted. The second box region includes a box around the
word ON to highlight it even more.
5-20
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
5
Use the [F7] STEP key then the [F6] SHOW key to move through the file and see how
the two boxed attribute regions work.
’Blower off/on text
MOVE TO 5, 10
DOUBLE WIDE
DISPLAY ”Blower off ON”
MOVE TO 6, 32
BOX 3 x 4
’
’Box attributes: Blower off normal
MOVE TO 5, 24
NORMAL
BOX ATTRIBUTES 1 x 3
MOVE TO 6, 32
DARK
/DARK
BOX ATTRIBUTES 3 x 4
’
’Box attributes: Blower ON highlighted
MOVE TO 5, 24
DARK
BOX ATTRIBUTES 1 X 3
MOVE TO 6, 32
BRIGHT
/DIM
BOX ATTRIBUTES 3 x 4
Drawing Bar Graphs
The following commands draw horizontal or vertical bar graphs.
HORIZONTAL BAR GRAPH nn, ff, mm
{ESC}[= nnn; fff; mmm h
This command makes a horizontal bar graph that flows toward the right-hand edge of
the screen.
nn - represents the number of whole cells for the graphed item in the bar; nn must be
expressed as an integer to represent whole character cells.
ff - represents the percentage of a single cell for the bar; ff must be expressed as an
integer from 0 to 99.
mm - represents the maximum number of cells for the bar.
When you invoke this command, it generates a bar of whole and fractional cells specified
by nn and ff. The command erases any previous bar. The bars use the current
foreground and background character attributes.
A single character cell appears 8 pixels ”wide.” Assuming a full 80 columns for a bar, this
results in as many as 640 pixel-formed bars (8 * 80) for a bar graph.
Typically, dynamic bar graphs would be generated through a series of escape sequences
issued by the host instead of through the OptiSCREEN command.
Example 1: Temperatures fall between 0 and 100 degrees. Generate a horizontal bar
graph that uses a maximum of 10 cells. Show a temperature of 43.5 degrees.
1.
Determine the range of the variable to be graphed.
Range = Maximum - Minimum
Range = 100 - 0
Range = 100
GFK-0361
Chapter 5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5-21
5
2.
Determine the maximum number of character cells for the graph.
mm = 10
3.
Decide the scaled actual value for the graph.
Scaled value = Graph amount * (mm / Range)
Scaled value = 43.5 * (10 / 100)
Scaled value = 4.35
4.
Determine the number of whole character cells for the graph.
nn = INT (Scaled value)
nn = INT (4.35)
nn = 4
5.
Determine the percentage of the remaining character to be graphed.
ff = (Scaled value - nn) * 100
ff = (4.35 - 4) * 100
ff = 35
The resulting bar graph command:
HORIZONTAL BAR GRAPH 4, 35, 10
Example 2: The count of an inventory item falls between -5 and 50. Generate a
horizontal bar graph that uses a maximum of 12 cells. Show a level of 32 items.
1.
Determine the range of the variable to be graphed.
Range = Maximum - Minimum = 50 - (-5) = 55
2.
Determine the maximum number of character cells for the graph.
mm = 12
3.
Decide the scaled actual value for the graph.
Scaled value = Graph amount * (mm / Range) = 32 * (12 / 55) = 6.98
4.
Determine the number of whole character cells for the graph.
nn = INT (Scaled value) = INT (6.98) = 6
5.
Determine the percentage of the remaining character to be graphed.
ff = (Scaled value - nn) * 100 = (6.98 - 6) * 100 = 98
The resulting bar graph command:
HORIZONTAL BAR GRAPH 6, 98, 12
VERTICAL BAR GRAPH nn, ff, mm
{ESC}[= nnn; fff; mmm v
This command makes a vertical bar graph that reaches up toward the top of the screen.
nn - represents the number of whole cells for the graphed item in the bar; nn must be
expressed as an integer to represent whole character cells.
ff - represents the percentage of a single cell for the bar; ff must be expressed as an
integer from 0 to 99.
5-22
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
5
mm - represents the maximum number of cells for the bar.
When you invoke this command, it generates a bar of whole and fractional cells specified
by nn and ff. The command erases any previous bar. The bars use the current
foreground and background character attributes.
A single character cell appears 10 pixels ”tall.” Assuming a full 15 rows for a bar, this
results in as many as 240 pixel-formed bars (10 * 15) for a bar graph.
Typically, a dynamic bar graph is generated through a series of escape sequences issued
by the host instead of through the OptiSCREEN command.
Example 1: A machine can process from 0 to 1000 objects per hour. Generate a vertical
bar graph that uses a maximum of 10 cells. Show 884 objects on the graph.
1.
Determine the range of the variable to be graphed.
Range = Maximum - Minimum
Range = 1000 - 0
Range = 1000
2.
Determine the maximum number of character cells for the graph.
mm = 10
3.
Decide the scaled actual value for the graph.
Scaled value = Graph amount * (mm / Range)
Scaled value = 884 * (10 / 1000)
Scaled value = 8.84
4.
Determine the number of whole character cells for the graph.
nn = INT (Scaled value)
nn = INT (8.84)
nn = 8
5.
Determine the percentage of the remaining character to be graphed.
ff = (Scaled value - nn) * 100
ff = (8.84 - 8) * 100
ff = 84
The resulting bar graph command:
VERTICAL BAR GRAPH 8, 84, 10
Example 2: Fluid levels must be maintained between 10 and 50 gallons. Generate a
vertical bar graph that uses a maximum of 8 cells. Show a level of 18.5 gallons.
1.
Determine the range of the variable to be graphed.
Range = Maximum - Minimum = 50 - 10 = 40
2.
Determine the maximum number of character cells for the graph.
mm = 8
3.
Decide the scaled actual value for the graph.
Scaled value = Graph amount * (mm / Range) = 18.5 * (8 / 40) = 3.7
4.
GFK-0361
Determine the number of whole character cells for the graph.
Chapter 5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5-23
5
nn = INT (Scaled value) = INT (3.7) = 3
5.
Determine the percentage of the remaining character to be graphed.
ff = (Scaled value - nn) * 100 = (3.7 - 3) * 100 = 70
The resulting bar graph command:
VERTICAL BAR GRAPH 3, 70, 8
Programmable Keyboard, Touch Screen, and Function Key
Commands
These commands allow you to set and use the programmable keyboard and touch
screen capabilities of a Mini OIT. The LOAD FUNCTION KEY command sets and uses
the function key capabilities for a Mini OIT.
To program the keyboard or touch screen, you must select ”FIVE” at the KEY CODES
line of the Configuration Menu.
Programmable Keyboard Programming
The 65-position sealed membrane keyboard is programmable. The keys can be loaded
individually through the LOAD KEY command or they can all be loaded together with
one of the internal key tables with the LOAD KEY TABLE command. The internal key
table options are Terminal, BASIC, and QWERTY. The character assignments of these
key tables are shown in Chapter 1.
Any of the 65 key positions can be programmed as a function key using the LOAD
FUNCTION KEY command. Each function key can be programmed to generate a
sequence of up to 16 ASCII characters. Not more than 16 keys can become function
keys.
On a cold start, the key table is initialized at the same time that the default configuration
is loaded. The default and user-defined key values are retained in non-volatile memory.
Touch Screen Programming
Touch Screen programming is done basically the same as for the programmable
keyboard except you use the MAKE TOUCH BOX command.
The Programmable Keyboard, Touch Screen and Function Key commands are described
below.
Displaying the Current Key Table
To display the current key table, from the Configuration menu, select the current KEY
CODES type (ONE-FIVE) and press the [F6] PERFORM key. Only the first 40 keys are
displayed. The escape sequence for displaying the current key table is {Esc} [ > 97 r.
CLEARKEY TABLE
{ESC}[>98r
This command eliminates any previous key table specifications and makes all key values
null.
5-24
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
5
DEFAULT KEY TABLE
{ESC}[>99r
This command sets the keys to the default key table as shown below.
A
41
B
42
C
43
D
44
E
45
F
46
G
47
H
48
I
49
4A
K
4B
L
4C
M
4D
N
4E
O
4F
P
50
Q
51
R
52
S
53
T
54
U
55
V
56
W
57
X
58
Y
59
Z
5A
[
\
5C
]
5D
^
5E
_
’
a
b
62
c
d
64
e
f
63
65
66
g
67
h
68
5F
i
60
61
k
6B
l
6C
m
6D
n
6E
o
6F
p
70
q
71
r
6A
u
75
v
76
w
77
x
78
y
79
z
{
74
|
7C
j
69
s
t
73
5B
J
7A
7B
72
Note
Only the top four lines are displayed on the Mini OIT screen.
LOAD KEY nn WITH vvv {ESC} nnn; k r
This programmable keyboard command loads a specific key with a value that you
specify. To use the command, specify the key position as a number between 1 and 65, as
shown in the figures below:
The following diagrams show the key position numbers associated with the keyboards
which can be programmed.
*
KEYS IN COLUMN 1 ARE NOT DEFINABLE
a42857
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
*
5
15
25
35
45
55
10
20
30
40
50
60
*
4
14
24
34
44
54
9
19
29
39
49
59
*
3
13
23
33
43
53
8
18
28
38
48
58
*
2
12
22
32
42
52
7
17
27
37
47
57
*
1
11
21
31
41
51
6
16
26
36
46
56
Figure 5-1. Key Location Numbers for the 65-Position Sealed Membrane Keyboard
GFK-0361
Chapter 5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5-25
5
a42879
GE Fanuc
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Mini OIT -Touch
Figure 5-2. Key Location Numbers for the 40-Position MiniOIT Touch Screen
Specify the value of the key to be programmed as a single ASCII character vvv. The
capital letters A through Z are indicated by the ASCII numbers 65 through 90, and the
lower case letters a through z are indicated by the ASCII numbers 97 through 122.
Key Value:
Output When Activated:
0 to 31
Standard ASCII non-displayable codes*
32 to 127
Standard ASCII displayable codes*
128 to 143
Function key codes F1 to F16
144 to 153
Control-1 to Control-9
154 to 169
Not used
170 to 171
IBM special key codes
172 to 175
Not used
176 to 177
IBM special key codes (Ins, End)
178
Cursor Down
179
IBM special key code (Page Down)
180
Cursor Left
181
Not used
182 to 184
Cursor Right, Home, Up key codes
185
IBM special key code (Page Up)
186 to 191
Not used
192 to 204
IBM special key codes
205 to 254
Not used
255
No keystroke code
* Refer to Appendix B for ASCII Codes.
The key tables contain unshifted, non-control values for 65 available key positions. If
used with the 65-position keyboard, all keys except the Reset, Break, Control, Repeat,
and Shift keys become user-definable. The Shift and Control keys are inactive. This
enables you to define the ASCII code generated by any of the 65 available key positions.
5-26
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
5
Example: Clear the programmable keyboard specification and load key number 1, with
the letter A.
CLEAR SCREEN
CLEAR KEY TABLE
LOAD KEY 1 WITH 65
MAKE TOUCH BOX nn AT LOCATION pp WITH VALUE vvv
nnn; ppp; vvv s
{ESC}[>
This touch screen command loads a specific touch zone, or touch key on a touch screen,
with a value that you specify. To use the command, specify the size of the touch box as
nn at location pp and filled with the ASCII value vvv.
To determine the size and the shape of box nn, specify a number between 1 and 8 as
described in the table below:
Touch Pad
Size
nn
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
How Many
Lines
High
Wide
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
How Many
Columns
High
Wide
4
4
8
8
4
4
8
8
8
16
8
16
8
16
8
16
Description of Box Interior
Box outline, inside erased
Box outline, inside erased
Box outline, inside erased
Box outline, inside erased
Box outline only
Box outline only
Box outline only
Box outline only
The system determines all boxes from the lower-left corner of location pp.
Location pp specifies the number between 1 and 40 of the touch-pad key as shown
above in the LOAD KEY nn WITH vvv command.
Example: Use the MAKE TOUCH BOX nn AT LOCATION pp WITH VALUE vvv
command to create a box at location 37 two touch keys by two touch keys large and
specify that the system fill the large box with the letter B.
CLEAR SCREEN CLEAR KEY TABLE ’Create the box and fill it with the letter
”B” MAKE TOUCH BOX 4 AT LOCATION 37 WITH VALUE 66
LOAD KEY TABLE nn {ESC}] >10n r
This programmable keyboard command loads a predefined key table. Specify key table
nn as a number (1, 2, or 4 to correspond with Terminal, BASIC, and QWERTY keyboard
layouts).
Example: Load key table 1s.
CLEAR SCREEN
CLEAR KEY TABLE
LOAD KEY TABLE 1
LOAD FUNCTION KEY nn WITH “text” {ESC} nnn t text {ETX}
This function key command loads function key nn with a value (text). Specify nn as a
function key number between 1 and 16, inclusive.
Example: Load function key [F12] with the RUN command.
LOAD FUNCTION KEY 12 WITH ”RUN”
GFK-0361
Chapter 5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5-27
5
User Programmable I/O Mode Commands
These commands are used to control the parallel port in User Programmable I/O mode.
Refer also to a further discussion of the User Programmable I/O Mode in Chapter 3,
Installation.
PARALLEL I/O MODE: nnn
{Esc}[>nnnp
This command establishes which of the 16 discrete bits of the parallel port are inputs and
which are outputs.
nnn -specifies a decimal number from 0 to 65535 which is processed as a 16-bit binary
value. This decimal number is calculated by adding the decimal values (shown in the
table below) of all bits being set to inputs. A decimal value of 0 will set all bits to outputs.
A decimal value of 65535 will set all bits to inputs.
Table 5-2. Parallel Port Bit Values for User Programmable I/O Mode
PIN
BIT
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
DECIMAL VALUE
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
32768
Example: Set parallel port data bits 0-7 to inputs and 8-15 to outputs.
Referring to the table above, add together the decimal value of each bit being set to an
input. The decimal value of outputs is zero. The sum of the decimal values for bits 0-7 is
255.
PARALLEL I/O MODE: 255
INPUT PARALLELDATA
{Esc}[>i
This command inputs the status of each bit on the parallel port. The value received is a
decimal number that is decoded by using the table of bit values above. A received
decimal value of 10, for example, would be decoded as bits 1 and 3 being ”On” and all
other bits being ”Off ”.
5-28
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
5
OUTPUT PARALLELDATA: nnn
{Esc}[>nnno
This command outputs data to the parallel port.
nnn - specifies a decimal value corresponding to the desired status of each bit. This
decimal value is calculated by adding the decimal value (in the table under the
PARALLEL I/O MODE command) of each bit to be ”On”.
Example: Turn data bits 1 and 8 of the parallel port ”On”. The sum of the decimal values
of bits 1 and 8 is 258.
OUTPUT PARALLEL DATA: 288
Data Fill Operations
In many situations, you will want to create a screen file that includes numerous blanks
for the host to later fill in with data. In order to fill in these blanks, the host must
perform some form of cursor positioning before sending the data for the blank field. To
simplify the cursor positioning the Screen Display and Data Fill escape sequence (Esc [ >
n f) has been developed.
To perform this operation you will normally create two screen files, using the
OptiSCREEN Editor. Screen file 1 will contain the text portion of the screen only. Screen
file 2 will contain special place holders in the form of [Ctrl]-E {ENQ} characters where
data from the host is to be sent.
First, the host will display file 1, the text portion of the screen, using the Screen Display
escape sequence (Esc [ > n w). Next, when the host is ready to send data, it will use the
Screen Display and Data Fill escape sequence (Esc [ > n f) to display the screen file 2
containing the blank space place holders. Then the host sends the data. When the host
is ready to send data again it uses the Screen Display and Data Fill escape sequence to
display the blanks only before sending data.
When the Screen Display and Data Fill escape sequence is executed, the screen will be
processed only up to the first [Ctrl-E] encountered. At this point, data received from the
host in On-Line mode, or from the keyboard in Local mode, will be placed on the screen
instead of spaces. As each additional character is received, it will be used to fill the
blanks in the file where [Ctrl]-E was placed. As the screen file is being processed, when a
character other than [Ctrl]-E is again encountered, normal file display will resume.
If a non-displayable character is received in the data to be filled in on the screen (e.g. a
carriage return, line feed), spaces will automatically be put on the screen for each [Ctrl]-E
in the same data field. A field is considered to end when a character other than [Ctrl]-E
is found in the display file. In this manner a field of 6 [Ctrl]-Es for a particular data value
may use fewer than 6 characters and be left justified in the blanks reserved for the data.
The host or application program can terminate a Data Fill sequence prior to sending all
of the characters required to fill the fields on the screen by sending a [Ctrl]-C (End of
Text). In this manner, only the highest priority fields on the screen can be updated if
desired.
The format for the Display File and Data Fill escape sequence (normally sent from the
host) is:
Esc [ > n f data data data ... data ETX
The file number is n; the ETX is optional and only required if fewer data characters are
sent than the blank fields in the file. An example of this operation is shown below.
GFK-0361
Chapter 5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5-29
5
Example Data Fill Operation
The display below is created using two separate screen files. Lower-case e’s are used to
show where the fill character ([Ctrl]-E) has been placed.
CURRENT SETPOINT: eeeee
CURRENT HIGH ALARM: eeeee
CURRENT LOW ALARM: eeeee
CURRENT TEMPERATURE: eeeee
HIGHEST TEMPERATURE THIS BATCH: eeeee
LOWEST TEMPERATURE THIS BATCH: eeeee
The text of the screen was created by the OptiSCREEN Editor as shown below:
CLEAR SCREEN
HOME
DISPLAY ”CURRENT SET POINT:”
MOVE 1, 2
DISPLAY ”CURRENT HIGH ALARM:”
MOVE 1, 3
Â
Â
Â
END
A second file was then created to include the blank space place holders.
MOVE TO
DISPLAY
MOVE T0
DISPLAY
MOVE TO
Â
Â
Â
END
1, 20
”{ENQ}{ENQ}{ENQ}{ENQ}{ENQ}”
2, 22
”{ENQ}{ENQ}{ENQ}{ENQ}{ENQ}”
3, 19
The {ENQ} character is the
blank space created by
pressing Ctrl-E.
In the example above, the operations in the first file could have been included in the
second file. But, using a separate file for the data fill operation allows the host to repeat
displaying of data without redisplaying the text portion of the screen.
The following Series Five ASCII/BASIC program running in the host could be used to
display the file and then fill in the blanks. Note that the syntax used in this example may
vary depending upon the type of BASIC being used.
10 PRINT CHR(27),”[>1w”
20 PRINT CHR(27),”[>2f”
30
40
50
60
Â
Â
Â
. . .
. . .
PRINT A
PRINT B
: REM print screen one
: REM print screen two fill command
: REM first data field
: REM second data field
In the above example, it was assumed that the variables A and B would be 5 characters
or less. Each of the BASIC Print statements will send a Carriage Return and Line Feed
after each variable. If a variable was less than 5 characters, then spaces would
automatically be used to pad out the fields. Therefore, each field is automatically
left-justified and trailing spaces are added as needed to erase old data that may have
been in the field.
5-30
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
5
Command Summary
The following command summary gives the format, a short description for each
command, and the page number where the command is fully documented. In the
following summary, brackets appear around optional arguments.
’comment (Comment) Specifies that the rest of the line is a comment.
[Ctrl] -E
{ENQ} (Data Fill) Holds space on display for character sent from host.
ATTRIBUTES: [nn,] nn, nn (Character attribute) Establishes two or more character
attributes as the current mode.
BLINK (Character attribute) Establishes the blinking character attribute mode.
BLINKING CURSOR (Cursor) Makes the cursor blink on the screen.
BLOCK CURSOR (Cursor) Makes the cursor appear as a solid block.
BOX ATTRIBUTES rr X cc (Graphics) Applies the currently defined character attributes
to a boxed region rr rows tall and cc columns to the right.
BOX rr X cc (Graphics) Creates an outlined box rr rows tall and cc columns to the right.
BRIGHT and /BRIGHT (Character attribute) Sets the monochrome foreground and
background intensity to higher than normal.
BRIGHT UNDERLINE (Character attribute) Sets the monochrome foreground intensity
level to BRIGHT and underlines the text.
CLEARKEY TABLE (Programmable Keyboard) Makes all programmable key values
null.
CLEAR LINE (Erasing and editing) Clears the contents of the current line.
CLEAR LINE FROM CURSOR (Erasing and editing) Clears the contents of the current
line from the cursor to the end of the line.
CLEAR LINE T0 CURSOR (Erasing and editing) Clears the contents of the current line
from the beginning of the line to the cursor.
CLEARSCREEN (Erasing and editing) Moves the cursor to the home position, clears
the screen, and resets all attributes to normal.
GFK-0361
Chapter 5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5-31
5
CLEARSCREEN FROM CURSOR (Erasing and editing) Clears the screen from the cursor to the end of the screen.
CLEARSCREEN TO CURSOR (Erasing and editing) Clears the screen from the home
position to the cursor.
CURSOR (Cursor) Makes the cursor visible.
DARK and /DARK (Character attribute) Sets the monochrome foreground and background intensity to dark.
DEFAULT KEY TABLE (Programmable keyboard) Sets the programmable keyboard to
the default key table.
DELETECHARACTER (Erasing and editing) Erases one character.
DELETE LINE (Erasing and editing) Deletes one line.
DIM and /DIM (Character attribute) Sets the monochrome foreground and background
intensity to lower than normal.
DIM UNDERLINE (Character attribute) Sets the monochrome foreground intensity level to DIM and underlines the text.
DISABLE CURSOR (Cursor) Disables cursor on the screen.
DISPLAY “text” (Display) Displays the string text.
DISPLAY FILE (File display) Displays OptiSCREEN file nn.
DISPLAY FILE nnn FROM BANK nnn (File display) Displays OptiSCREEN file from
specified bank.
DOUBLESIZE TOP/BOTTOM LINE (Line attribute) Establishes double size as the current line attribute mode.
DOUBLE WIDE (Character attribute) Establishes the double wide character set as the
current mode.
DOUBLE WIDE LINE (Line attribute) Establishes double wide as the current line attribute mode.
DOWN [nn] (Cursor) Moves the cursor down one or nn rows.
5-32
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
5
EMPTY BOX rr X cc (Graphics) Creates an empty box rr rows tall and cc columns to
the right.
END (End of File) Indicates the end of the OptiSCREEN file.
EXIT DOUBLE WIDE AND BLINK (Character attribute) Resets the double wide and
blinking character attributes to normal.
EXIT QUAD (Character attribute) Exits the quad character set.
EXIT SUPPLEMENTAL (Character attribute) Exits the supplemental character set.
FILL BOX rr X cc WITH “a” (Graphics) Creates a box rr rows tall and cc columns to the
right filled with character a.
HOME (Cursor) Moves the cursor to row 1 and column 1.
HORIZONTAL BAR GRAPH nn, ff, mm (Graphics) Generates a horizontal bar graph nn
whole cells to the right, ff (0 to 99) fractional cells to the right, and mm maximum cells to
the right.
INDEX (Cursor) Moves the cursor down one row.
INSERT LINE (Erasing and editing) Inserts one line below the cursor.
LEFT [nn] (Cursor) Moves the cursor left one or nn columns.
LINE rr (Cursor) Moves the cursor to the beginning of line rr.
LOAD FUNCTION KEY nn WITH “text” (Function key) Loads function key nn with
ASCII values text.
LOAD KEY nn WITH vvv (Programmable keyboard) Loads key nn with character vvv.
LOAD KEY TABLE nn (Programmable keyboard) Loads key table nn.
MAKE TOUCH BOX nnn AT LOCATION nnn (Touch screen) Creates a touch move at a
specified location on the screen.
MOVE TO rr [, cc] (Cursor) Moves the cursor to row rr and column cc.
NEW LINE (Cursor) Moves the cursor down to the beginning of the new line.
GFK-0361
Chapter 5 OptiSCREEN Command Reference
5-33
5
NO CURSOR (Cursor) Disables the cursor on the screen.
NORMAL and /NORMAL (Character attribute) Sets the monochrome foreground and
background intensity to normal.
QUAD SIZE (Character attribute) Establishes the quad character set as the current
mode.
RESET ATTRIBUTES (Character attribute) Resets all character attributes to the default.
RESET LINE ATTRIBUTES (Line attribute) Resets all line attributes to the default operating mode.
RESTOREPOSITION (Cursor) Returns the cursor to the location stored with SAVE
POSITION.
REVERSE INDEX (Cursor) Moves the cursor up one row.
REVERSED (Character attribute) Establishes the reverse video character attribute
mode.
RIGHT [nn] (Cursor) Moves the cursor right one or nn columns.
SAVE POSITION (Cursor) Stores the current location of the cursor for recall with RESTORE POSITION.
SCROLL LINES nn TO pp (Erasing and editing) Specifies the top line of the scrolling
region as nn and the bottom line as pp.
SINGLE SIZE LINE (Line attribute) Establishes single size as the current line attribute
mode.
STEADY CURSOR (Cursor) Makes the cursor non-blinking on the screen.
SUPPLEMENTAL (Character attribute) Establishes the supplemental character set as
the current mode.
UNDERLINE (Character attribute) Sets the monochrome foreground intensity level to
normal and underlines the text.
UNDERLINE CURSOR (Cursor) Makes the cursor appear as an underline character.
UP [nn] (Cursor) Moves the cursor up one or nn rows.
VERTICALBAR GRAPH nn, ff, mm (Graphics) Generates a vertical bar graph nn
whole cells up, ff (0 to 99) fractional cells up, and mm maximum cells up.
5-34
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
Chapter
6 Utility Programs for the IBM PC
6
section level 1 1
figure bi level 1
table_big level 1
Introduction
With only a keyboard and the Mini OIT, you can create, append, and delete screen files
as well as program the function keys.
Included with each Mini OIT is a set of utility programs intended to enhance screen
editing operations. (These utility programs are provided on a floppy diskette under the
manufacturer ’s logo.) These programs, as well as the following material describing their
application, are provided through GE Fanuc Automation by the manufacturer of the
Mini OIT to aid in the development of application programs and screens.
Note
With respect to these utility programs, GE Fanuc Automation North
America Inc. makes no warranty or representation whatsoever and the
entire risk, of whatever kind, arising out of the use of such programs is
assumed by the user.
Starting-Up the Utilities
If you are using the utilities on a GE Fanuc Automation computer such as the
Workmaster or Cimstar computer, you must first change the IWS.BAT file from:
t
BASICA IWS/C:20000
to
GWBASIC IWS/C:20000
and put GWBASIC in the ”Path” of the computer.
Note
GWBASIC is compatible with BASICA A3.10, therefore GWBASIC can be
substituted for BASICA in the instructions below.
If you are using the utilities on an IBM PC or compatible other than a GE Fanuc
Automation computer, put BASICA in the ”Path” of the computer.
To execute a program, select the drive containing the utilities, then type:
IWS
GFK-0361
6-1
6
IWS UTILITIES
IWS BACKUP/RESTORE AND DOCUMENTATION UTILITY PROGRAMS
(v 2.32) SELECT DESIRED PROGRAM:
1 - IWSLINK ....User Memory Backup/Restore - For backup of all IWS
memory including screens, Optibasic, and user data
2 - IWSBAS* ....Upload/Download OptiBASIC Programs For documenting OptiBasic programs.
3 - IWSFILE ....Upload/Download OptiScreen screen files For documenting OptiScreen screen files.
4 - IWSEDIT ....Screen Development, Editing, Up/Downloading - For IWS
units without OptiScreen (Firmware 2.1 and below)
5 - GENERAL OPERATING, COMPATIBILITY & CABLING INSTRUCTIONS
6 - EXIT TO DOS
* IWSBAS is not used with the Mini OIT.
Next, select the desired program from the Main Menu. Select ”5” from the menu for
operating instructions and cabling information.
It is not necessary to use the IWSEDIT editor with OITs that offer the built-in
OptiSCREEN Editor. Use the IWSEDIT editor with OITs containing firmware release 2.1
or earlier.
The function of each menu item is described below.
IWSLINK - User Memory Backup/Restore
Note
Ignore references to secondary port which appear in the software. Use
the primary (serial) port.
This program emulates a STRLINK III digital cassette recorder. This recorder is used by
many programmable controller manufacturers for tape program backup. The OIT
includes standard commands for this function.
For those users not having access to a STRLINK III, the IWSLINK utility program allows
an IBM compatible computer to emulate a STRLINK III. This program provides a
one-step complete backup of all user memory. This backup image can later be reloaded
into one or more Operator Interface Terminals.
The file created with this program has the extension .IWS. Except for very experienced
programmers, these files would not be used for any other purposes.
Follow the instructions below prior to executing IWSLINK.
6-2
1.
This program must be executed using IBM compatible BASICA. It was written under
DOS 3.0 and BASICA A3.10, other versions of DOS and BASICA except for
GWBASIC are not guaranteed to work.
2.
Use either the IWS.BAT program to begin operation from DOS, or be sure to set the
communication buffer size to 20000 bytes by entering at the DOS prompt the
following:
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
6
BASICA IWSLINK /C:20000
3.
This program uses the PC COM1 port, and the OIT primary port.
4.
This program assumes the default drive is a hard disk. If your default drive is not a
hard disk, slower baud rates may have to be used.
5.
The baud rate is fixed at 9600, using 8 bits, no parity. You may edit this program to
use COM2 or slower baud rates, however, 8 bit word length must be maintained.
6.
For Firmware Releases prior to 2.0 the OIT should be set to SPACE parity, for Release
2.0 and later set the OIT to 8 bit, none parity, with hardware handshaking.
7.
The cable between the OIT and an IBM PC async card is 2-3, 3-2, and 7-7 with pins 5
and 20 jumpered together at the OIT end. Jumpering at the PC end may be
required, and other models of PC communication cards will frequently have
different pinouts.
8.
If an error occurs, reset the OIT, check the configuration, and type RUN to restart
this program.
IWSFILE - Upload/Download OptiSCREEN files
This program is specifically designed to take OptiScreen screen files developed on an
OIT, and upload them to disk where they can be stored, edited using a variety of editors,
and subsequently downloaded back into an OIT.
The files stored on disk are given a name by the user, and are automatically given the
filename extension of .FIL
Primary Port 1 of the OIT must be configured for 9600 baud, NONE parity, 8 data bits, 1
stop bit, SOFT, Point to Point.
You must run this utility for each screen file you wish to Upload or Download
Connect the cable from the IBM PC to Primary Port 1 of the OIT.
IWSEDIT - Screen Development, Editing, Up/Downloading for OITs without
OptiSCREEN
The IWS SCREEN EDITOR is designed to allow the creation, editing, and storage of OIT
screen files on an IBM compatible personal computer.
It allows files stored on disk to be downloaded to an OIT, as well as uploaded from an
OIT to a disk.
The user can create complete libraries of screens on disk that can be used individually or
in combination for a variety of projects.
While an understanding of OIT commands (Escape Sequences) is useful, most of the
frequently used functions can be performed using menu driven sequences in this
program.
The first function this program performs is to verify that an OIT is connected and
communicating over the IBM COM1 port. It requests the operator to type the number 1,
and if a 1 is received, it indicates that a communications link has been established. If a 1
is not received, a message that the link has not been established is given and the
GFK-0361
Chapter 6 Utility Programs for the IBM PC
6-3
6
operator should verify that the OIT is properly connected and configured prior to
continuation.
At this time, the editor menu is displayed, and any text entered on the IBM PC’s
keyboard, will be automatically transmitted to the IWS and displayed on the screen. The
characters will also be displayed on the bottom of the IBM screen. Any control characters
or command sequences will also be displayed in this region.
Also at the bottom of the screen will be displayed the total number of characters entered
for the screen, and the current character position, which may not be at the end of the
screen.
6-4
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
Appendix A Mounting Diagrams
A
section level 1 1
figure_ap level 1
table_ap level 1
This section includes mounting diagrams for the Mini OIT.
a42848
9.9 INCHES
GE Fanuc
Î
Î
Î
8.5
INCHES
Mini OIT
13.0 INCHES
Figure A-1. Dimensions of the Mini OIT
5.8”
5.8”
C
L
3.825”
a42849
3.55”
C
L
3.55”
3.825”
2.0”
6.075”
2.0”
6.075”
Figure A-2. Mounting Diagram for the Mini OIT
GFK-0361
A-1
Appendix B ASCII Codes and Special Character Sets
section level 1 1
B
section
11 1
figure level
bi level
figure_ap
table_biglevel
level1 1
table_ap level 1
The Mini OIT uses standard ASCII codes for display and communication. Additionally,
the Mini OIT offers special Supplemental Standard graphics, and Quad Size character
sets.
ASCII Codes and Characters
The decimal values, hexadecimal values, characters, and descriptions for the standard
ASCII characters appear below. Characters marked with an asterisk (*) are not
processed.
GFK-0361
Decimal
Hex
Character
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
[Ctrl][email protected]
[Ctrl]-A
[Ctrl]-B
[Ctrl]-C
[Ctrl]-D
[Ctrl]-E
[Ctrl]-F
[Ctrl]-G
[Ctrl]-H
[Ctrl]-I
[Ctrl]-J
[Ctrl]-K
[Ctrl]-L
[Ctrl]-M
[Ctrl]-N
[Ctrl]-O
[Ctrl]-P
[Ctrl]-Q
[Ctrl]-R
[Ctrl]-S
[Ctrl]-T
[Ctrl]-U
[Ctrl]-V
[Ctrl]-W
[Ctrl]-X
[Ctrl]-Y
[Ctrl]-Z
[Ctrl]-[
Description
NUL, null or tape feed*
SOH, start of header
STX, start of text
ETX, end of text
EOT, end of transmission
ENQ, enquiry
ACK, acknowledge*
BEL, external bell output
BS, backspace
HT, horizontal tab
LF, line feed
VT, vertical tab*
FF, form feed
CR, carriage return
SO, shift out
SI, shift in
DLE, data link escape
DC1, device control 1, XON
DC2, device control 2*
DC3, device control 3, XOFF
DC4, device control 4*
NAK, negative acknowledge*
SYN, synchronous idle*
ETB, end of transmission block
CAN, cancel escape sequence
EM, end of medium*
SUB, substitute*
(left square bracket) ESC, esc
B-1
B
B-2
Decimal
Hex
Character
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
[Ctrl]-\
[Ctrl]-]
[Ctrl]-^
[Ctrl]-_
[Space]
!
‘‘
#
$
%
&
’
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Description
(backslash)FS, file separator*
(right square bracket) GS, group separator
(caret) RS, record separator
(underscore) US, unit separator*
(exclamationpoint)
(double quotation mark)
(hatch, number sign, or pound)
(dollarsign)
(percent sign)
(ampersand)
(apostrophe or single right quote)
(left or open parenthesis)
(right or close parenthesis)
(asterisk or star)
(plus sign)
(comma)
(minus sign, hyphen, or dash)
(period or dot)
(slash or forward slash)
(zero)
(colon)
(semicolon)
(less than)
(equals)
(greater than)
(questionmark)
(at sign)
(begin uppercase letters)
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
B
GFK-0361
Decimal
Hex
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
80
Character
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
__
’
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
DEL
[F1]
Description
(end uppercase letters)
(left or open bracket
(backslash or reverse slash)
(right or close square bracket)
(up arrow sign or caret)
(underscore)
(grave accent or single left quote)
(begin lowercase letters)
(end lowercase letters)
(left or open squiggly brace)
(verticalline)
(right or open squiggly brace)
(tilde)
(delete or rubout)
(begin function keys)
Appendix B ASCII Codes and Special Character Sets
B-3
B
B-4
Decimal
Hex
Character
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154169
170171
172175
176177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186191
192204
205254
255
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9AA9
AAAB
ACAF
B0B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
BABF
C0CC
CDFE
FF
[F2]
[F3]
[F4]
[F5]
[F6]
[F7]
[F8]
[F9]
[F10]
[F11]
[F12]
[F13]
[F14]
[F15]
[F16]
[Ctrl]-0
[Ctrl]-1
[Ctrl]-2
[Ctrl]-3
[Ctrl]-4
[Ctrl]-5
[Ctrl]-6
[Ctrl]-7
[Ctrl]-8
[Ctrl]-9
Description
(end function keys)
(begin control keys
(end control keys)
not used
IBM special key codes
not used
IBM special key codes
Cursor down
IBM special key code (page down)
Cursor left
not used
Cursor right
Home
Up
IBM special key code (page up)
not used
IBM special key codes
not used
no keystroke
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
B
Supplemental Standard Graphics Set
From the Standard Character Set, you can enter the Supplemental Standard Graphics Set
with the OptiSCREEN SUPPLEMENTAL command. Return to the Standard Character
Set with the EXIT SUPPLEMENTAL command.
The Supplemental Standard Set includes the following:
numbers 0 to 9
uppercase A to Z
space
!
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
]
I
#
$
%
&
’
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
[
\
The Supplemental Standard Graphics Set appears below.
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
a44106
^ (94)
(95)
‘ (96)
a (97)
b (98)
c (99)
d (100)
e (101)
a44107
f (102)
GFK-0361
g (103)
h (104)
i (105)
Appendix B ASCII Codes and Special Character Sets
j (106)
k (107)
l(108)
m(109)
B-5
B
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
n (110)
v (118)
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
o (111)
w (119)
p (112)
x (120)
q (113)
y (121)
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
r (114)
z (122)
s (115)
{ (123)
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
a44108
t (116)
u (117)
a44109
| (124)
} (125)
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
a44110
~ (126)
Quad Size Character Set
From the Standard Character Set, you can enter the Quad Size Character Set with the
OptiSCREEN QUAD command. Return to the Standard Character Set with the EXIT
QUAD command.
The Quad Size Character Set includes the following:
numbers 0 to 9
uppercase A to Z
space
!
*
+
B-6
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
,
.
=
?
GFK-0361
B
Alternate Graphics Set
From the Standard Character Set, you can enter the Alternate Graphics Set with the
OptiSCREEN ALTERNATE command. Return to the Alternate Graphics Set with the
EXIT ALTERNATE command.
The Alternate Graphics Set appears below.
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
sp (32)
40
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
0 (48)
GFK-0361
! (33)
41
” (34)
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
* (42)
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
1 (49)
2 (50)
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
# (35)
+ (43)
$ (36)
3 (51)
Appendix B ASCII Codes and Special Character Sets
, (44)
4 (52)
% (37)
– (45)
5 (53)
& (38)
. (46)
6 (54)
a44111
’ (39)
a44112
/ (47)
a44113
7 (55)
B-7
B
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
K (75)
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
M (77)
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
N (78)
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
8 (56)
@ (64)
H (72)
P (80)
B-8
9 (57)
A (65)
I (73)
Q (81)
: (58)
B (66)
J (74)
R (82)
; (59)
C (67)
S (83)
< (60)
= (61)
D (68)
L (76)
T (84)
E (69)
U (85)
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
> (62)
F (70)
V (86)
a44114
? (63)
a44115
G (71)
a44116
O (79)
a44117
W (87)
GFK-0361
B
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
Ï
Ï
Ï
Ï
Ï
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
m (109)
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
X (88)
‘ (96)
h (104)
Y (89)
a (97)
i (105)
p (112)
GFK-0361
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Z (90)
b (98)
j (106)
q (113)
[ (91)
c (99)
(92)
d (100)
k (107)
r (114)
l (108)
s (115)
Appendix B ASCII Codes and Special Character Sets
] (93)
e (101)
t (116)
a44118
^ (94)
f (102)
n (110)
(95)
a44119
g (103)
a44120
o (111)
a44121
u (117)
B-9
B
Supplemental Alternate Graphics Set
From the Alternate Graphics Set (described above), you can enter the Supplemental
Alternate Graphics Set with the OptiSCREEN SUPPLEMENTAL command. Return to
the Alternate Graphics Set with the EXIT SUPPLEMENTAL command.
The Standard Supplemental Graphics Set appears below.
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
^ (94)
f (102)
(95)
g (103)
‘ (96)
h (104)
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
n (110)
B-10
a (97)
i (105)
b (98)
j (106)
c (99)
k (107)
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
Ï ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
o (111)
p (112)
d (100)
q (113)
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
l (108)
a44122
e (101)
a44123
m (109)
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
Ï
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
a44124
r (114)
GFK-0361
Appendix C Screen Programming Template
a44779
C
section level 1 1
figure_ap level 1
table_ap level 1
GFK-0361
C-1
Appendix D ANSI Escape Sequences for PLCs
D
You may create an OptiSCREEN file with numerous blanks left for the host to fill with
data. The file creation and appending procedures allow you to create the screen file
using the [Ctrl]-E (ENQ, enquiry) control character for the locations on the screen where
the system displays data. When you develop a screen, enter a [Ctrl]-E for each character
to be filled. A blank space appears on the screen which will be filled with data.
When you use the standard screen display escape sequence ({ESC}[>nnnw where nnn
specifies the screen), the system continues to place a space wherever you entered a
[Ctrl]-E.
However, when you use the data file escape sequence ({ESC}[>nnnf where nnn
specifies the screen), the system only processes up to the first [Ctrl]-E you entered. At
this point, data received from the host in Online mode or from the keyboard in Local
mode is placed on the screen instead of spaces.
As the system receives each additional character, it uses the character to fill the blanks in
the file where you placed a [Ctrl]-E. As the screen file is being processed, when a
character other than a [Ctrl]-E is encountered, normal file display resumes until the next
[Ctrl]-E is encountered.
In the event that a non-displayable character (such as a line feed) is received in the data
to be filled on the screen, the system automatically places a space on the screen for all
the [Ctrl]-E characters in the same data field. A field is considered to end when a
character other than a [Ctrl]-E is found in the display file. In this manner, a field of six
[Ctrl]-E characters for a particular data value may use fewer than six characters and be
left justified in the blanks reserved for the data.
The host or application program can terminate a data fill sequence prior to sending all of
the characters required to fill the fields on the screen by sending a [Ctrl]-C (ETX, end of
text) control character. In this manner, only the highest priority fields on the screen can
be updated.
The format for the data fill escape sequence appears below:
{ESC} [>nnnf data1, data2, ..., datan {ETX}
The file number is nnn. The {ETX} character is optional only required if fewer data
characters are sent than the blank fields in the file.
A complete list of escape codes for use with PLCs appears below. The first column
contains the escape sequences. The second column contains the OptiSCREEN command
descriptions. Refer to Chapter 5 for detailed descriptions of the OptiSCREEN
commands.
GFK-0361
D-1
D
Table D-1. Escape Sequence OptiSCREEN Command
{SOH}{STX}
{SOH}remark{STX}
{ESC}>nnnv<data>EOT
{ESC}nnnm
{ESC}nnn;nnnm
{ESC}5m
{ESC}>11l
{ESC}>4h
{ESC}=lll;ccca
{ESC}=lll;cccd
{ESC}33m or {ESC}1m
{ESC}43m
{ESC}37m
{ESC}>98r
{ESC}2K
{ESC}0K
{ESC}1K
{ESC}2J
{ESC}0J
{ESC}1J
{ESC}>5l
{ESC}30m
{ESC}40m
{ESC}>99r
{ESC}P
{ESC}M
{ESC}31m or {ESC}2m
{ESC}41m
{ESC}35m
{ESC}>15h
{ESC}>9l or {ESC}>20l
{ESC}>8l
{ESC}?16h
{ESC}2h
{ESC}>5h
{ESC}literal
{ESC}>nnnw
{ESC}>dw
{ESC}>nnnf<data>ETX
{ESC}>nnn; nnnw
{ESC}>97r
{ESC}#3
{ESC}#4
{ESC}15m
{ESC}#6
’
’remark
Append to file nnn *
ATTRIBUTE: nnn
ATTRIBUTES: nnn, nnn
BLINK
BLINKINGCURSOR
BLOCK CURSOR
BOX ATTRIBUTES lll X ccc
BOX lll X ccc
BRIGHT
/BRIGHT
BRIGHTUNDERLINE
CLEAR KEY TABLE
CLEARLINE
CLEAR LINE FROM CURSOR
CLEAR LINE TO CURSOR
CLEARSCREEN
CLEAR SCREEN FROM CURSOR
CLEAR SCREEN TO CURSOR
CURSOR or ENABLE CURSOR
DARK
/DARK
DEFAULT KEY TABLE
DELETECHARACTER
DELETELINE
DIM
/DIM
DIMUNDERLINE
Disable cursor control keys *
Disable auto carriage return on line feed *
Disable auto line feed on carriage return *
Disable display *
Disable keyboard input *
DISABLE CURSOR or NO CURSOR
DISPLAY”literal”
DISPLAY FILE nnn
Display file directory *
Display file nnn with embedded data, ETX is optional for terminating fill prior to completing screen *
DISPLAY FILE nnn FROM BANK nnn
Display key table *
DOUBLE SIZE TOP LINE
DOUBLE SIZE BOTTOM LINE
DOUBLE WIDE
DOUBLE WIDE LINE
* These escape sequences have no OptiSCREEN equivalent and are normally used by the host.
D-2
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
D
Table D-1. Escape Sequence OptiSCREEN Command - continued
{ESC}linB
{ESC}#8
{ESC}=lin;ccce
{ESC}>9h or {ESC}>20h
{ESC}>8h
{ESC}>14h
{ESC}>15l
{ESC}?16l
{ESC}2l
{EOT}
{ESC}?2h
{ESC}?7h
{ESC}4h
{ESC}22m
{ESC}17m
{ESC}10m or {SI}
{ESC}4l
{ESC}?7l
{ESC}=lin;cccbchar
{ESC}f or {ESC}H
{ESC}=nnn;sss;qqqh
{ESC}D
{ESC}>255u
{ESC}>i
{ESC}L
{ESC}cccD
{ESC}nnnf or {ESC}nnnH
{ESC}>nnntstr{ETX}
{ESC}>nnn;sssr
{ESC}>10nr
{ESC}nnn; nnn; nnn; s
{ESC}lin;cccf or {ESC} lin;cccH
{ESC}E
{ESC}32m or {ESC}>0m
{ESC}42m
{ESC}>nnno
{ESC}>nnnp
{ESC}16m
{ESC}6n
{ESC}c
{ESC}m or {ESC}0m
{ESC}#0
{ESC}r
{ESC}z
{ESC}lin; cccR
{ESC}u or {ESC}8
{ESC}M
{ESC}7m
{ESC}cccC
{ESC}s or {ESC}7
{ESC}>13h
DOWN line
E’s Test - Fills screen with the letter E *
EMPTY BOX lin X col
Enable auto carriage return on line feed *
Enable auto line feed on carriage return *
Enable echo (half-duplex) *
Enable cursor control keys *
Enable display *
Enable keyboard input *
END
Enter VT52 mode *
Enter wrap at end of line mode *
Enter insert character mode *
EXIT DOUBLE WIDE AND BLINK
EXIT QUAD
EXITSUPPLEMENTAL
Exit insert character mode *
Exit wrap at end of line mode *
FILL BOX lin X ccc WITH ”char ”
HOME
HORIZONTAL BAR GRAPH nnn, sss, qqq
INDEX
Initialize file storage area *
INPUT PARALLELDATA
INSERT LINE
LEFT ccc
LINE nnn
LOAD FUNCTION KEY nnn WITH ”str ”
LOAD KEY nnn WITH sss
LOAD KEY TABLE nnn
MAKE TOUCH BOX nnn AT LOCATION nnn WITH VALUE nnn
MOVE TO lin, ccc
NEW LINE
NORMAL
/NORMAL
OUTPUT PARALLELDATA: nnn
PARALLEL I/O MODE: nnn
QUAD SIZE
Report cursor position *
Reset-Alternate sequence to {ESC}z *
RESET ATTRIBUTES
RESET LINE ATTRIBUTES
Reset system to full screen scroll *
Reset to saved power-up configuration *
Response to cursor position report *
RESTORE POSITION
REVERSEINDEX
REVERSED
RIGHT ccc
SAVE POSITION
Set hardware handshaking *
* These escape sequences have no OptiSCREEN equivalent and are normally used by the host.
GFK-0361
Appendix D ANSI Escape Sequences for PLCs
D-3
D
Table D-1. Escape Sequence OptiSCREEN Command - continued
{ESC}>13l
{ESC}14m
{ESC}#5
{ESC}nnn; nnnr
{ESC}5n
{ESC}>11h
{ESC}11m or {SO}
{ESC}>nnnx
{ESC}>dx
{ESC}p or {ESC}0p
{ESC}1p
{ESC}2p
{ESC}36m or {ESC}4m
{ESC}>4l
{ESC}linA
{ESC}=nnn;sss;qqqv
{ESC}0c or {ESC}c
Set software handshaking *
Shade (dim background, bright foreground) *
SINGLE SIZE LINE
SCROLL LINES nnn TO nnn
Status Report - Returns {ESC}On *
STEADY CURSOR
SUPPLEMENTAL
Transmit file nnn out primary port *
Transmit file directory out primary port *
Transmit page (primary port) *
Transmit current line (primary port) *
Transmit character at cursor (primary port) *
UNDERLINE
UNDERLINECURSOR
UP lin
VERTICAL BAR GRAPH nnn, sss, qqq
What are you - Returns {ESC}?1; 2c to indicate the terminal will
operate as VT100 with Advanced Video Option *
* These escape sequences have no OptiSCREEN equivalent and are normally used by the host.
D-4
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
Appendix E VT52 Escape Sequences
section level 1 1
figure_ap level 1
table_ap level 1
E
It is not recommended that VT52 escape sequences be used with new application
software.
The first column in the following list contains the character or characters that follow the
escape character, and the second contains the function of that sequence.
SEQUENCE
FUNCTION
#
/Z
<
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
Transmit Page.
Response to ESC Z (VT100 identification code for VT52).
Enter ANSI mode.
Enter insert character mode.
Cursor up.
Cursor down.
Cursor right.
Cursor left.
Clear screen (except status lines).
Enter graphics mode.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Exit graphics mode.
Move cursor to home position.
Reverse index (reverse scroll).
Erase from cursor to end of screen.
Erase from cursor to end of line.
Insert a line at cursor position.
Delete line at cursor position.
Delete character at cursor.
Exit insert character mode.
Special function key ”f1” (transmitted only).
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
Y
Special function key ”f2” (transmitted only).
Special function key ”f3” (transmitted only).
Special function key ”f4” (transmitted only).
Special function key ”f5” (transmitted only).
Special function key ”f6” (transmitted only).
Special function key ”f7” (transmitted only).
Special function key ”f8” (transmitted only).
Cursoraddressing.
<line#><col#>
Line and column numbers are single ASCII characters where ASCII code 32 decimal is
used to designate line or column one and increase from there.
Z
GFK-0361
Identify as VT52. Response: ESC / K.
E-1
E
SEQUENCE
^
(underscore)
b
c
d
e
j
k
l
n
E-2
FUNCTION
Transmitstatus line(s).
Transmit current (cursor) line.
Transmit character at cursor.
Erase from beginning of display to cursor.
Enable clock display.
Disable clock display.
Send time to host (Transmits HHMMSS<CR>).
Save current cursor position.
Restore current cursor position.
Erase entire line.
Cursor position report.
Response: ESC Y <line #> <col #).
See cursor positioning notes above.
o
p
q
v
w
x<parameter>
x4
x5
x8
x9
x;
x=
x>
Erase from beginning of line to cursor.
Enter reverse video mode.
Exit reverse video mode.
Enter wrap at end of line mode.
Exit wrap at end of line mode.
VT52 set modes.
Set block cursor.
Disablecursor.
Enable auto line feed on carriage return.
Enable auto carriage return on line feed.
Set non-blinking cursor.
Set hardware handshaking.
Enable ECHO (half duplex).
y<parameter>
y4
y5
y8
y9
y;
y=
y>
z
(
)
VT52 reset modes.
Set underline cursor.
Enable cursor.
Disable auto line feed on carriage return.
Disable auto carriage return on line feed.
Set blinking cursor.
Set software handshaking.
Disable half duplex.
Reset to power up configuration.
Enable keyboard.
Disable keyboard.
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
Appendix F Function Key Operations
F
section level 1 1
figure_ap level 1
table_ap level 1
The 16 function keys are programmed to perform two independent functions. In Local
mode, they are used as single key entries to select various character and line attributes
allowing user screens to be programmed easily. In On-Line mode, they transmit the
escape sequences shown for the VT52 mode or the currently programmed messages for
the ANSI mode.
In the ANSI mode, the function keys transmit user-defined messages which may include
other escape sequences. These messages may contain up to 16 ASCII characters. The
default messages (escape sequences) for the ANSI mode or the standard VT52 messages
(escape sequences) will be ignored upon receipt by the terminal.
To program new ANSI messages, the escape sequence ESC [ > n t followed by the
message and terminated with ETX (Control-C) is used. This escape sequence can be
entered while in Local mode or On-Line mode. The terminal will truncate any
programmed messages at 16 characters, and will fill any unused character locations up to
16 with NULLs. These escape sequences may be programmed as part of a screen file.
In On-Line mode, the function keys are not preprogrammed.
In Local mode, the function keys have been preprogrammed to perform specific tasks.
These are as follows:
f1 = Reset to normal video display (resets attributes marked with *).
f2 = Select foreground intensity/color *.
f3 = Select background intensity/color *.
f4 = Terminate an f2 or f3 selection.
f5 = Enter blink video *.
f6 = Enter reverse video *.
f7 = Enter double wide character mode *.
f8 = Exit blink and/or double wide mode.
f9 = Enter quad size character mode.
f10 = Exit quad size character mode.
f11 = Set line to double high tops & double wide.
f12 = Set line to double high bottoms & double wide.
f13 = Set line to single high & single wide.
f14 = Not used.
f15 = Not used.
f16 = Clear all attributes Includes video attributes and line attributes.
Exits supplemental graphics.
Exits quad size characters.
The function keys f2 and f3 are used in a sequence such as f2 n f4 or f3 n f4. These keys
allow any combination of foreground and background intensities to be combined. They
are also designed to be upward compatible with color models of the terminal. The
parameter n yields the effect shown in the following table.
GFK-0361
F-1
F
n
MONOCHROME
NOTES
0
1
Hidden (Black)
Dim\
Defaultbackground
2
3
Normal
Highlight\
Defaultforeground
4
----\
5
Underline&Dim\
6
Underline & Normal\
7
Underline&Highlight\
Note
Underline is a foreground attribute only.
The attribute ”shade” described earlier is the combination of a dim background and
highlight foreground. It can be achieved using the sequence: f2 3 f4 followed by f3 1 f4.
Obviously many other versions of shade can be created using the above parameters.
Reverse in monochrome automatically switches the foreground and background
intensities. In the color mode, reverse will only switch parameters 0 to 3.
F-2
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
Appendix G STR-LINK III Communications Protocol
section level 1 1
figure_ap level 1
table_ap level 1
G
Backup of user memory from the Mini OIT using a STR-LINK III digital tape recorder
must be performed at 4800 baud or less. The serial port may be configured as either the
primary or secondary port, but must use 8 bit, no parity.
IBM Utility programs supplied with Release 2.1 or later of the full size OIT may be used
with the Mini OIT, and the standard baud rate of 9600 will work properly.
Experienced programmers may wish to use a personal computer or other device to back
up user memory instead of a STR-LINK III Digital Cartridge Recorder. The following
outline shows the protocol used by the Mini OIT during Save, Load, and Verify
operations.
STEP
Mini OIT TRANSMITS
1
2
3
DC1 (11H)
4
DC3 (13H)
5
6
EOT (04H)
STR-LINK III
TRANSMITS
ACK (06H)
User Memory *
Acknowledge
ACK (06H)
Acknowledge
ACK (06H)
Acknowledge
Reader On
Reader Off
Rewind
7
* For releases prior to 2.0, one character per byte of memory is transmitted. (If 16K memory, then 16,384
characters will be sent).
For releases 2.0 and later, a 4-byte header is transmitted for each memory block used,
plus the characters, plus a zero at the end of all data. The 4-byte header for each
memory block includes the following:
Byte 1:
Byte 2 & 3:
Byte 4:
# of K-bytes in memory block (in packed BCD format).
# of bytes in memory block (in binary).
Memory block type code (in binary).
The Memory block type code is as follows:
Block type 0 = Screen memory.
Block type 1 = Basic program memory.
Block type 2 = Basic data memory.
Block type 3 = Back-up screen memory.
Block type 4 = Back-up program memory.
Block type 5 = To be defined.
GFK-0361
G-1
G
STEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Mini OIT TRANSMITS
DC2 (12H)
Punch On
SO (0EH)
User Memory *
SI (0FH)
DC4 (14H)
Shift out
EOT (04H)
Rewind
STR-LINK III
TRANSMITS
ACK (06H)
Acknowledge
ACK (06H)
Acknowledge
ACK (06H)
Acknowledge
Shift in
Punch Off
*If 16K memory, then 16,384 characters will be sent.
A 250ms delay prior to step 5 (SI) is used to differentiate this as a valid command from
possible data equal to 0FH.
G-2
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User’s Manual - September 1993
GFK-0361
Index
CLEAR LINE TO CURSOR {ESC}[lb]1K,
5-16
A
AC Power, 3-2
CLEAR SCREEN {ESC}[lb]2J, 5-15
ALTERNATE {ESC}[12m, EXit ALTERNATE {ESC}[13m, 5-8
CLEAR SCREEN FROM CURSOR
{ESC}[lb]0J, 5-15
Alternate Graphics Set, B-7
CLEAR SCREEN TO CURSOR
{ESC}[lb]1J, 5-15
Apostrophe (’) Comment, 5-3
ASCII Codes and Characters, B-1
Attaching the Keyboard, 2-2
Clearing the Screen, 5-14
COMMAND FORM {ESC}xxx, 5-3
Command Summary, 5-31
ATTRIBUTES: nn, nn {ESC} nnn; nnn
m, 5-12
Comment and End of File, 5-1
Communication Test, 4-11
Communication Type (Point–to–P oint or
Multidrop, 4-10
B
Battery Replacement, 3-3
Comparison of Various Character Attribute Modes, 5-9
Battery Voltage Test, 2-3
Confidence Tests, 4-11
Baud Rate Selection, 4-9
Configuration Menu, 4-2
BLINK {ESC}[lb]5m, 5-7
Configuration Options, 4-5
BLINKING CURSOR {ESC}[lb]>11l, 5-4
Configuration Using Touch Boxes, 4-3
BLOCK CURSOR
Configuring the Mini OIT, 3-12
{ESC}[lb]>4h, 5-4
{ESC}[lb]=
Connecting the Mini OIT to a PLC
through the Parallel Port, 1-5
BOX rr X cc {ESC}[lb]= rrr, ccc d, 5-18
Connecting the Mini OIT to a PLC
through the Serial Port, 1-4
BOX ATTRIBUTES rr X cc
rrr; ccc a, 5-20
BRIGHT {ESC}[lb]33m, 5-10
BRIGHT UNDERLINE
5-11
{ESC}[lb]>37r,
C
Connecting the Parallel Port to PLC Output Modules, 3-25
Control Keys, 4-21
Cable Wiring Configurations, 3-9
Controlling the Appearance of the Cursor,
5-3
Calling a Screen File from Another Screen
File, 2-12
Controlling the Location of the Cursor, 5-4
Cancel, 4-21
Conventions for the OptiSCREEN Commands, 5-2
Changing a Screen File from Absolute to
Relative, 2-11
Creating a Graphic Screen, 2-10
Character Attribute, 5-1
Creating a Sample Screen Format, 2-14
Character Attribute Commands, 5-6
Creating a Text Screen File, 2-7
CLEAR KEY TABLE
CRT Adjustment, 3-29
{ESC}[lb]>98r, 5-24
CLEAR LINE {ESC}[lb]2K, 5-15
CLEAR LINE FROM CURSOR
{ESC}[lb]0K, 5-15
GFK-0361
Connecting the Mini OIT-Touch to a PLC
through the Serial Port, 1-4
Ctrl–1, 4-21
Ctrl–2, 4-21
Ctrl–3, 4-21
Index-1
Index
Ctrl–4, 4-21
Easy Display Mode, 1-5 , 3-21
Cursor, 5-1
Echo or No–Echo Mode, 4-8
CURSOR or ENABLE CURSOR
{ESC}[lb]>5l, 5-4
EDIT [lb]F5] Key, 4-16
Cursor Commands, 5-3
EMPTY BOX rr X cc {ESC}[lb]= rrr; ccc
e, 5-19
Cursor Type, 4-8
Edit Mode, 4-2 , 4-7
END {EOT}, 5-3
End of Line Controls, 4-8
D
Entering OptiSCREEN Statements, 4-18
DARK {ESC}[lb]30m, 5-11
Entering the File Edit Function, 4-17
Data Fill Command with the Parallel Port,
3-20
Erasing and Editing, 5-2
Data Fill Operations, 5-2
Example Data Fill Operation, 5-29
Escape, 4-21
Data Fill OperationsMounting Diagrams,
A-1
DEFAULT KEY TABLE
5-25
{ESC}[lb]>99r,
Escape Sequence Type, 4-7
Example Data Fill Operation, 5-30
EXIT [lb]F2] Key, 4-16
DELETECHARACTER {ESC}[lb]P, 5-16
EXIT DOUBLE WIDE AND BLINK
{ESC}[lb]22m, 5-7 , 5-9
Delete File(s), 4-15
EXIT QUAD {ESC}[lb]17m, 5-8
DELETE LINE {ESC}[lb]M, 5-16
EXIT SUPPLEMENTAL {ESC}[lb]10m or
{SI}, 5-7
Diagnostic Test, 4-11
DIM {ESC}[lb]31m, 5-10
DIM UNDERLINE {ESC}[lb]35m, 5-11
DIP Switches, 3-4
Display, 5-2
Display and File Display Commands, 5-14
Exiting the Configuration Menu, 4-5
Extended Memory Operations, 4-12
Extended Memory Test, 4-12
F
DISPLAY FILE nn {ESC}[lb]> nnn w,
5-14
Feature Comparison Between OIT Models, 1-6
DISPLAY Statement Text Strings, 4-18
Features of the Mini OIT, 1-1
Configuration Screen, 1-2
Keyboards, 1-2
OptiSCREEN Editor, 1-2
Serial and Parallel Interface, 1-2
Size, 1-2
Touch Screen Capability, 1-2
Display Test Pattern Test, 4-12
DOUBLE SIZE TOP LINE {ESC}#3, 5-13
DOUBLE WIDE {ESC}[lb]15m, 5-9
DOUBLE WIDE LINE {ESC}#6, 5-13
DOWN {ESC}[lb]B, 5-5
Drawing Bar Graphs, 5-21
E
Easy Display, 4-10
Index-2
Erasing and Editing Commands, 5-14
File Display, 5-2
File Editing Operations, 4-17
FILL BOX rr X cc WITH ”a” {ESC} rrr;
ccc b a, 5-20
Front and Right Side View of the Mini
OIT, 3-29
Function Keys, 4-20
GFK-0361
Index
Line Attribute Commands, 5-12
G
General Operation of the Mini OIT, 1-2
LINE rr {ESC}[lb] rrr f or {ESC}[lb] rrr
H, 5-6
Generating Boxes and Boxed Regions,
5-18
LOAD FUNCTION KEY nn WITH ”text”
{ESC} nnn t text {ETX}, 5-27
Graphics, 5-2
LOAD KEY nn WITH vvv {ESC} nnn; k
r, 5-25
Graphics Commands, 5-18
LOAD KEY TABLE nn
5-27
H
Local Mode, 4-2 , 4-7
Handshaking with RS–232C Signals, 3-7
Handshaking with RS–422 Signals, 3-8
Handshaking, Parallel Port, 3-20
HOME
{ESC}]>10n r,
{ESC}[lb]H or {ESC}[lb]f, 5-4
HORIZONTAL BAR GRAPH nn, ff, mm
{ESC}[lb]= nnn; fff; mmm h, 5-21
How Multidrop Operation Works, 3-17
M
MAKE TOUCH BOX nn AT LOCATION
pp WITH VALUE vvv {ESC}[lb]>
nnn; , 5-27
Manufacturing Cycle Test, 4-12
Memory Test, 2-4
Mini OIT, 1-1
Mini Oit Touch Screen, 1-9
I
Mode of Operation, 4-7
Modes of Operation, 2-4 , 4-1
INDEX {ESC}D, 5-6
INPUT PARALLELDATA
5-28
{Esc}[lb]>i,
Modifying the Configuration, 4-4
Mounting the Mini OIT, 3-1
INSERT LINE {ESC}[lb]L, 5-17
MOVE TO rr, {ESC}[lb] rrr f, 5-4
Inserting and Deleting Characters, 4-18
Multidrop Operations, 3-12
Inserting and Deleting Lines, 4-18
Inserting Text, 5-16
N
Installing Memory, 3-26
NEW LINE {ESC}E, 5-6
Installing the AC Power, 2-1
Installing the Battery, 2-2
NO CURSOR or DISABLE CURSOR
{ESC}[lb]>5h, 5-4
Introduction, 6-1
NORMAL {ESC}[lb]32m, 5-11
Number of Stop Bits, 4-9
K
Keyboard Operation, 4-19
Keyboards Used with the Mini OIT, 1-7
O
On–Line Mode, 4-1
OptiSCREEN Command Reference, 5-1
OptiSCREEN Command Types, 5-1
L
LEFT {ESC}[lb]D, 5-5
Line Attribute, 5-1
GFK-0361
OptiSCREEN Editor Menu, 4-14
OptiSCREEN Editor Menu Operations,
4-15
Delete File(s), 4-15
Index-3
Index
Print Current Edit File, 4-15
Print Directory, 4-15
Print File, 4-15
Print Syntax List, 4-15
Receive File, 4-15
Select Edit File, 4-15
Select Printer/Receive Device, 4-15
Select Screen Bank, 4-15
OptiSCREEN Editor Menu OperationsPrint Current Edit File, 4-15
OptiSCREEN Editor Menu OperationsPrint Syntax List, 4-15
OptiSCREEN Editor Menu OperationsSelect Edit File, 4-15
OptiSCREEN Editor Special Function
Keys, 4-15
[lb]F1] UTIL Key, 4-16
[lb]F10] VIEW Key, 4-16
[lb]F2] EXIT Key, 4-16
[lb]F5] EDIT Key, 4-16
[lb]F6] SHOW Key, 4-16
[lb]F7] STEP Key, 4-16
OptiSCREEN Editor Special Function KeysUTIL [lb]F1] Key, 4-16
Programmable Keyboard, Touch Screen,
and Function Key, 5-2
Programmable Keyboard, Touch Screen,
and Function Key Commands, 5-24
Q
QUAD SIZE {ESC}[lb]16m, 5-8
Quad Size Character Set, B-6
R
Rear Panel Connections, 3-1
Rear View of the Mini OIT, 3-2
Receive File, 4-15
RESET ATTRIBUTES {ESC}[lb]m or
{ESC}[lb]0m, 5-10
RESET LINE ATTRIBUTES
5-13
{ESC}#0,
OptiSCREEN Editor, The, 4-14
RESTORE POSITION {ESC}8 or
{ESC}[lb]u, 5-6
OUTPUT PARALLEL DATA: nnn
{Esc}[lb]>nnno, 5-29
REVERSE INDEX {ESC}M, 5-6
P
Parallel and Serial Port are Primary, 4-10
REVERSED {ESC}[lb]7m, 5-7
RIGHT {ESC}[lb]C, 5-5
S
PARALLEL I/O MODE: nnn
{Esc}[lb]>nnnp, 5-28
Sample Program, The, 2-15
Parallel Port Description, 3-19
SAVE POSITION {ESC}7 or {ESC}[lb]s,
5-6
Parallel Port is Primary, Serial Port is Auxiliary, 4-10
Save/Recall Configuration Screen Parameters, 4-10
Parallel Port Operation, 3-19
Saving and Recalling the Configuration,
4-5
Parity Selection, 4-9
Port Configurations, 3-4
Ports, 3-4
Powering–Up the Mini OIT, 2-3
Index-4
Programmable Keyboard Programming,
5-24
Saving, Renumbering, and Renaming a
Screen File, 4-18
Screen Saver, 4-9
Print Directory, 4-15
SCROLL LINES nn TO pp {ESC}[lb]
nnn; ppp r, 5-17
Print File, 4-15
Scrolling the Program, 4-18
Private Control Keys, 4-21
Sealed Keyboard Encoding, 4-9
Program Comments, 4-18
Select Printer/Receive Device, 4-15
GFK-0361
Index
Select Screen Bank, 4-15
The Sample Program, 2-15
Send Any Case/Send Upper Case Only,
4-8
Touch Configuration, 4-3
Serial and Parallel Ports, 3-4
Type 1 Keyboard, 4-9
Serial Cable and Connector Specifications,
3-8
Type 2 Keyboard, 4-9
Serial Port Configuration, 4-9
Serial Port Description, 3-6
Serial Port is Primary, Parallel Port is Auxiliary, 4-10
Serial Port Operations, 3-6
Serial/Parallel Port Configurations, 4-10
Shift In, 4-21
Touch Screen, 1-9
Type 3 Keyboard, 4-9
Type 4 Keyboard, 4-9
Type 5 Keyboard, 4-9
Type of Handshaking, 4-9
Typical Serial Cable Wiring Configurations, 3-9
U
Shift Out, 4-21
SHOW [lb]F6] Key, 4-16
UNDERLINE {ESC}[lb]36m, 5-11
SINGLE SIZE LINE {ESC}#5, 5-13
UNDERLINE CURSOR
5-4
Specifications of the Mini OIT, 1-10
STEADY CURSOR
{ESC}[lb]>11h, 5-4
STEP [lb]F7] Key, 4-16
SUPPLEMENTAL {ESC}[lb]11m or
{SO}, 5-7
Supplemental Alternate Graphics Set,
B-10
{ESC}[lb]>4l,
UP {ESC}[lb]A, 5-5
User Programmable, 4-10
User Programmable I/O Mode Commands, 5-2 , 5-28
Using the Configuration Menu, 2-5
Using the OptiSCREEN Editor, 2-6
Supplemental Standard Graphics Set, B-5
V
T
text text DISPLAY ”text” text, 5-14
The Configuration Menu
Accessing the Configuration Menu, 4-3
Sample Configuration, 4-4
GFK-0361
VERTICAL BAR GRAPH nn, ff, mm
{ESC}[lb]= nnn; fff; mmm v, 5-22
VIEW [lb]F10] Key, 4-17
W
The Configuration MenuDefault Configuration for the Mini OIT, 4-7
Wiring for RS–422 Communications, 3-13
The OptiSCREEN Editor, 4-14
Word Length, 4-9
Index-5
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement